Copyright: dviout for Windows Ver.3.16


Contents

          dviout for Windows
          Ver.3.18, February 11, 2006
      Copyright(c) 1990-2006 SHIMA

Installation
Notes for non-Japanese Windows95/98/NT/XP users
Supported Functions
Preview
Move
Printing
String Search
String Copy
HyperTeX
Embedding into DVI file
User Interface
Property Sheets
Parameters
Information Display
Link to Other Programs
Presentation Mode
Start and Exit
Uninstall
Known Problems
Q&A
Distribution
Attached Programs
dviout Users Group
Supplement
Terminology

dviout for Windows is written for Borland C++ 4.5/5.0/5.01, C++ Builder 4.0 and Visual C++ 4.0/5.0/6.0/2005.
This help was created by using MakeHelP.


Supported Functions

dviout for Windows is a TeX device driver for Windows 95/98/Me and Windows NT/2000/XP. It has the same functions as the earlier MS-DOS versions of dviout and dviprt.

1. Applicable TeX
- Normal European-Language TeX (Omega(-j), lambda(j)) and NTT JTeX
- pTeX (a Japanized TeX developed by ASCII corp.)

2. Extended Functions
- tpic specials
- color specials(Check color specials: check the page-independence of the color stack and correct it if it is not indepndent)
- PostScript specials (for color, scaling and rotation, support graphics package of LaTeX2e, PSfrag, and a DVI file for dvips, require Ghostscript)
- reading EPS/PS/WMF/EMF/PBM/BMP/BMC and other(PNG/JPEG/TIFF/PCD etc. if Susie plug-in is installed)Image data files(-spi:)
- gzipped DVI files and image data files are supported
- HyperTeX specials
- dviout specials
- source specials enhanced by string search
- Embedding into DVI and usage by dviout for any file(Automtic Font/Image Embedding including the initial parameters)
- Direct reading of a tar file

3. Preview Function
- gray scale display (antialiasing for colored characters)
- two types of Loupe([Common])
- simultaneous display of 2/4/16 pages(Display Menu)
- Display grid lines(View Menu)
- Presentation Mode: cover sheet, draw lines, pause special, continuous scroll, pop-up menu
- Call the grphic editor for the included graphics(-gsrc:)
- auto renewal coresponding to the renewal of the dvi file(-renew:)

4. Printing Functions
Supports three Printing methods:
- color/monochrome printing and fax transmission by Windows 95/98/Me and Windows NT/2000/XP drivers
- printing by proprietary built-in drivers(dviprt Printing)
- printing by external programs other than dviout(dviprt Printing)
Also supports
- Printing Two Pages per Sheet
- Reduce/Magnify Printing Function.
- Page Option

5. European Language Fonts and NTT JTeX Japanese Fonts
- PK, PXL1001, PXL1002, PXL1003 formats fonts (but not GF)
- European Language TrueType Font(cf. Q_F14), OpenType Font
- PostScript fonts(require GhostScript, gsftopk and ps2pk)
- Virtual fonts, subfont(-TEXSUBF:)
- Automatic Font Generation for missing ones by METAFONT.

6. Font Library
- FAR Font Library
- GTH Font Library
- FLI Font Library

7. ASCII pTeX and NTT JTeX Japanese Fonts
- Windows 3.1 or Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP TrueType Japanese fonts
- JXL4 fonts
- fixed-size bitmapped Japanese fonts and reduced versions in proprietary formats
- "Shotai Kurabu" format fonts
- Generate jfm files for TrueType Japanese proportional fonts

8. Other functions
- file and folder history
- image output in EMF/BMP/BMC/PDF/PNG(Q_O7)(or PBM, G3FAX, EPSF)etc.
- String Search
- String Copy(can be copied to clipboard)
- Link to Other Programs
- English/Japanese On-line Help
- Support to edit a source file of TeX(Help -> Help TeX)
- automatic changing parameters between previewing and printing([REGISTRY])
- functions can be attached to any key([Key])
- unicode
- generating the jfm files for Japanese proportional TrueType fonts (Attached Programs:propw)
- keeping ten sets of parameter settings with giving any names([REGISTRY])
- Input/Output of Parameter Setting from/to a file


Distribution
Dviout for Windows is a free software, as are the predecessors dviout and dviprt for MS-DOS.  In principle, Source Code is also publicly available along with the executables.  These packages can be freely distributed.  At this writing, the latest versions and information about them can be obtained from the following URL:

http://akagi.ms.u-tokyo.ac.jp/ftp.html#TeX

If you want to incorporate dviout for Windows into a commercial product, contact the developer (oshima@ms.u-tokyo.ac.jp) execpt for the case when no answer can be got for more that one month.

Some test versions may have limited distribution.  Refer to the attached document, which has more up-to-date information than the descriptions in this help.


dviout Users Group

The dviout Users Group has established a mailing list to exchange the following information among users.

1. Problems occurring when a user uses dviout/dviprt, the specifications, bugs, techniques, improvements, patches, etc.

2. More broadly, TeX and related software, and information useful to participants in the dviout mailing list.

The address is

  dviout@akagi.ms.u-tokyo.ac.jp

This mailing list can be freely joined and left.  The procedure is automated.
If you send a mail with only one line in the body containing

subscribe address

to the above address, you are automatically registered as a member at the submission address.  The mail (usually in Japanese) sent to the above address by a member is distributed to all of the members.  To leave the list, replace "subscribe" in the body of the mail with the two lines.

#bye
#quit

and send to the above address.  More information, including the list of subjects, can be obtained from

http://akagi.ms.u-tokyo.ac.jp/dvioutML.html

These pages are administered by the dviout developer.  Since the developer (cf. Distribution) can not reply all the mails, please do not expect a reply.

Note: The above description is current as of December 1996.  There may be future changes.


Known Problems

 - Some of the error displays and their corresponding remedies are inappropriate.

 - The specification for the number of copies may become invalid in the print dialog for a dvi file containing only one page.  (Press [Setup...] once to enter [Printer Setup].  Select OK to enable the specification of multiple copies.)

 -  In the state where the wheel button of a Microsoft IntelliMouse is pressed and the mouse cursor is moved outside dviout where the wheel button is released, the wheel operation by dviout is somewhat strange, for instance, entering the same state as when the wheel button is pressed.
If the wheel button is clicked again in dviout, this is undone.

 - There is a fatal bug related to reading TrueType fonts in Windows NT Service Pack 3, and dviout also generates errors (Windows NT will be freezed).  Get a patch from Microsoft.

 - Handling of color images fails or becomes extremely slow at 600dpi or higher resolutions.  This could be a Windows problem.

 - White letters with black background or overlapped images or letters are happened to be printed incorrectly by PostScript printer. This is a bug in the Windows printer driver for PostScript. Some other printer drivers have the same problem(Q_P10).

 - Sometimes the task bar doesn't disappear under Presentation Mode.  Click the task bar and dviout Window by the mouse or change status "always show on the top" or "hide automatically" in the properties of the task bar.


MakeHelP
To create this help, we used

  MakeHelP Ver.1.01c 1996/Ver.1.02 1997
  Copyright (c) 1996-1997, Yamamoto at Yama-BBS


Attached Programs

The following programs are attached to dviout for Windows.  When they are executed without parameters, simple explanations will appear.

chkfont: Show font informations of dvi file, Font Metric File(tfm file/jfm file), Font Glyph File(pk/gf/pxl), font library file(GTH Font Library/FAR Font Library) etc.

bmc: Utility for BMC and other graphic files
- Transformation between BMP file and BMC file made from PostScript file
- Removal of a binary header contained in EPSF
- Making a file with BoundingBox of graphic data which will be used by graphics package of LaTeX2e
- Transformation of graphic files in various formats to BMP files or to files in other formats
- Information of a graphic file
To handle graphic files different from EPSF/BMP/BMC/WMF/EMF, the corresponding Susie plug-in (cf. -spi:) is required. Similarly ABC output plug-ins are necessary for the transformation into various graphic formats.

createBB: A user interface to create files *.bb with BoundinBox using bmc.

propw: Make JFM files for proportional Japanese TrueType fonts.

dvispc: Utility to analyze DVI file.
- If a DVI file using color specials or tpic specials may not be page-independent.  This program checks and corrects it.
- Translations  DVI file <-> Text file  with a compatible mode for DTL (=DVI Text Language by dv2dt/dt2dv).

dviadd: Embedding into DVI file for any files and extract them from the DVI file. This program is used by Font/Image Embedding.

etfdump: Get precise informations on embedded fonts and initial.par(Font/Image Embedding).

srctex: Insert source specials/pause specials into a TeX file.

convedit: If a TeX compiler finds an error in a file processed by srctex, convedit makes it possible to edit the original TeX file according to the TeX environment variable TEXEDIT.

rawprt: Output the data from stdin to the printer.

optcfg: Transform the source of configuration of a printer to the form (CFG File) which dviout can read.  The reverse transformation is also possible.  This is unnecessary if Windows printer driver is used.

ttindex: This makes font index files with the extension *.tti  which are only used for dviout to expand Japanese TrueType font.  Usually the expansion is done by Windows and they are unnessesary.
They are used to handle Japanese fonts under Non-Japanese Windows or to embed Japanese TrueType font into DVI file(Font/Image Embedding).


Supplement

dviout has progressed through the MS-DOS version developed with the cooperation of many people and has resulted in the current Windows 95/NT version.

The following dviout functions were provided with substantial cooperation from the following people.  I am grateful to these people and many others who provided supports concerning many issues (SHIMA).

- Prototype - TSG(Science Group of Tokyo Univ.)
- Manual - Y. Kusumi, Senshu, Togashi
- Integration into Ver. 2.34 - sempa
- PC-9801 High-Resolution Mode -  OkI
- DOS/V -  SOLITON, hero.h
- AX - Akiii
- J-3100 - sempa, hero.h, Senshu
- HP100LX - HARUYA
- ESC/Page - Tomiie, OkI
- LIPS III ESC/Page Integration - OkI
- tpic specials - Oh-Yeah?
- New size option - Yoshizawa
- pTeX - Naochan!
- NTTJTeX - Yakumo
- Shotai Kurabu Font - Hideki Yoshida, Minagawa, Mukauchi
- JG Font - Naochan!
- TrueType Font - Matsuda
- FLI Format Font - Hideyasu Yoshizaki
- Reducing and Enlarging the System Font - Naochan!, Yoshizawa, Matsuda
- Function to automatically generated a missing font - Yakumo
- PostScript - Takanori Uchiyama
- PBM Image Data - Yakumo
- GIF Image Data(No more supported) - Asayama
- Page description language embedding - Sadayuki Iwai
- Windows 95/NT Version - Otobe
- Raw mode printer output in Windows - Matsuda
- Virtual Fonts - Matsuda
- PSfrag - Matsuda
- Source for VC++ - Kenji Yorimoto
- subfont - Cho Jin-Hwan
- Help in English - Scientific Software Department, Application Software Division, NEC Corporation, Haruhiko Okumura and Hiroo Hongo

Reports from many users provided the driving force behind the growth to a better system.  If you have questions about dviout bugs or find mistakes in the help scriptions, please contact the dviout Users Group or the developers (cf. Distribution).


Uninstall

To uninstall dviout, do the followings to restore the state before dviout was Installed.

1. Use "Option -> Uninstall" (to erase the entire contents of the Registry written by dviout and to remove dviout from the start menu).  Then quit current dviout session.

2. Delete files, such as dviout.exe, dviout.hlp, and dviout.cnt and any related files, dviout.par, dviout.vfn, and documents (by using the Windows Explorer).

Note 1. dviout does not install or modify any files in the Windows directory.  Only the Windows Registry is related to the Windows systems.  For ease of uninstalling, it would be better to put dviout files to a separate directory besides any other applications.

Note 2. Usually, Upgrading dviout requires only to replace files,  dviout.exe, dviout(e).hlp, and dviout(e).cnt.  Exceptions, if any, will be described in the documentation.  You don't have to press "Option -> Uninstall"  when upgrading.  If you do this, the various Parameters previously set are all cleared.

Note 3. Be aware that after using "Option -> Uninstall" to delete Registry entries for dviout, if dviout is started, Registry is written to again.

Note 4. When setting or updating with "Option -> Install", the previous settings are overwritten and deleted.  Therefore, an Uninstall is not needed before this action.


Preview

Dviout for Windows can display a dvi file on a Windows screen with fonts in the same resolution (dpi) as the fonts used in Printing (by reducing their resolutions on the screen using gray scale).  See Q_O30 for details.

In general,  using gray scale would results in better readability than without using gray scale for the same display resolution.

If you want to speed up the displaying or you do not want use gray scale, 118-dpi fonts can be used as in the MS-DOS version of the dviout.  (In this case, select "Property Sheets -> [Display]" and specify the unscaling, then the gray scale is not used.)

By clicking the right button of the mouse, the loupe function can be used to display an enlarged or reduced section of the page.  (The loupe adjustment is "Property Sheets -> [Common]")

Several objects such as the Status Bar in the view can be hidden (View-> ...).  Hiding them would results in a larger display for previewing.


Parameter List
dviout for Windows has the following Parameters.  Refer to Example of Parameter Setting.

Font related: -TEXROOT: -TEXPK: -TEXFONTS: -TEXSUBF: -L: -F: -FB: -Fod:
Font related(Part2): -A: -c: -gen: -TEXPKD:  -TEXFLI: -ttf: -Fkeep: -virtual: -ftt:
Font related(Part3): -TEXKNJ: -ntt: -nttF: -S: -J: -JC: -vfn: -g: -Jfm: -Jbt: -Jgt: -G:
Print position and range related: -area: -LM: -TM: -RM: -BM: -OX: -OY:  -HC: -VC: -HS: -VS: -dviprt:
Size and resolution related: -y: -dpi: -dpiv: -mag: -e: -varf:
View related: -BMP: -scale: -t: -bright: -base: -box: -sdpi: -cmode:
Graphics related: -tpic: -GS: -gsx: -GIF: -gdat: -gfit: -gow: -gclip: -gbox: -gsize: -color: -spi:
HyperTeX related: -hyper: -hyperoff: -href: -hname: -hbuf:  -sdpi: -Browser: -ToEdit:
Search related: -search: -sdpi: -sFont:
System related: -br: -bb: -bf: -multi: -log: -renew: -button: -macro: -file: -mode: -src: -gsrc: -Set:
 -isp: -texhelp:


Example of Parameter Setting

This example prints by using the dviout driver and not the Windows printer driver to a 300dpi LBP printer (LIPS III).

This list is displayed by "Option->Non-default Parameters"; parameters not listed keep their default values.

button=+
GIF=4
gsx=c:\aladdin\gs6.0\bin\gswin32c.exe
gdat=.;c:\aladdin\gs6.0\lib
gen="`c:\usr\local\bin\mktexpk.exe ^s ^d ^D ^M"
TM=5.0mm
BM=5.0mm
LM=5.0mm
RM=5.0mm
dviprt=+`l
TEXFONTS=^r\tfm\\
src='c:\Program Files\Hidemaru\Hidemaru.exe^s/j%d "%s"'

If everything is written out by "Option->All parameters", the following results.

mag=-1
half=-
br=0x64000
bf=0x64000
bb=0x3e8000
multi=2
renew=+
button=+
dpi=300
dpiv=0
e=0
t=16
tpic=2
GS=1
GIF=4
gsx=c:\aladdin\gs6.0\bin\gswin32c.exe
gdat=.;c:\aladdin\gs6.0\lib
gbox=-
gow=-
gclip=+
gfit=+
gsize=-
gclip=+
color=+
spi=^$
cmode=0
search=192
sFont="cmex*lasy*lcircle*line*logo*msam*euex*ascgrp* cmsy*cmbsy*msbm*eusm*eusb*"
sdpi=150
hyper=0x1c064
hyperoff=0
href=0x1000
hname=0x800
hbuf=0x20000
Browser=^$
L=2
c=-
Fkeep=+
F=^$
FB=0
A=0
K=^$
G=goth
g=+
JC=
varf=-
base=-
box=-
gen="`c:\usr\local\bin\mktexpk.exe ^s ^d ^D ^M"
vfn='
%version=2
%vfont_list
1,"cmr10"
%jfm_list
edefault,1,a,a,n,0;0;0,,1,0
'
ttf=1
ftt=^$
virtual=+
Fod=+
nttF=^$
ntt=-
S=1000
J=0
Jbt=+
Jgt=-
Jfm=+
y=A4P
PW=210.0mm
PH=297.0mm
area=+
TM=5.0mm
BM=5.0mm
LM=5.0mm
RM=5.0mm
MW=0.0mm
MH=0.0mm
OX=0.0mm
OY=0.0mm
HC=-
VC=-
HS=0.0mm
VS=0.0mm
edge=16
log=^$
Wshow=-
BMP=4:4:800
scale=4:4:800:2:2:800:6:6:800:1:1:800
bright=255
dviprt=+`l
TEXROOT=^T\fonts
TEXPK=^r\pk\\^s.^dpk;^r\tfm\\ptex\^s.tfm;^r\vf\\^s.vf
TEXPKD=^$
TEXKNJ=^$
TEXFLI=^$
TEXFONTS=^r\tfm\\
TEXSUBF=^r\..\ttf2pk\\;^r.\ttf2tfm\\
macro='!A!Zdy!pdl !A!N!Q!F;!A!T;!ADX;fn!b !A!Z!pdf !A!Z!pdl "-OX=0mm -OY=0mm !I"'
src='c:\Program Files\Hidemaru\Hidemaru.exe^s/j%d "%s"'
gsrc=^$
texhelp=-NULL=(554,-20)-(1026,700)
isp=^$
file=
key=$$:JB=^B:DC=^C:JG=^G:JH=^J:FN=^N:FO=^O:FP=^P:SU=^R:SD=^S:JT=^T:JX=^X:DH=^_:JI=/
key=D1=1:D2=2:D3=3:D4=4:DF=5:DL=6:DT=7:DS=8:D6=9:JF=<:JL=>:JF=F:JL=L:JM=M:JN=N:JP=P
key=JQ=Q:JR=R:JL=l:JM=m:JN=n:JP=p:JQ=q:JR=r:HH=0:SD=2:SU=e


Property sheets
  [CONTENTS], [Display], [Resolution], [Font], [Font2],
  [WinJFont], [JFont2], [Key], [Search], [HyperTeX],
  [Common], [Graphic], [Printer], [Paper], [System], [REGISTRY]


HyperTeX

HyperTeX is TeX with an added HyperJump function (link information to other resources and link target information) of the HyperText Markup Language (HTML), and is implemented by HyperTeX specials.

Dviout interprets HyperTeX specials.  If you press a hot spot by the left button of the mouse, you can jump to another part of the same text or to another local dvi file.  You can also jump to other resources by executing an application associated to the linked file or by calling the default WWW browser.

When the cursor moves on a hot spot, the shape of the cursor changes and the link information is shown on the status bar.

Property Sheets -> [HyperTeX] specifies colors for link strings (Universal Resource Locators, or URLs; default is blue string with underline) and size of the cache buffer for resolving links.

When the dvi file foo.dvi contains a HyperTeX anchor Chapter1, say, then starting dviout by the command line

    dviout foo #Chapter1

directly jumps to the anchor position.

If "Associating dvi files with dviout" is in effect, then the WWW browser automatically starts dviout for links with .dvi extension (cf. "no more dviout").

If a dvi file requires graphic files to be included, the function Embedding into DVI file is useful to unify the files.

It is also possible to search the location of a indicated anchor by String Search.

See the samples hyperdvi.dvi, sample.dvi in the package of dviout.


String Search

You can search for strings in the currently displayed dvi file on dviout. You can also search for 2-byte character strings (hiragana, kanji, etc.) for Japanized dvi files by pTeX (a Japanized TeX developed by ASCII corp.).

The search string can be specified in "Search->Find..." or from the Combo Box in the Toolbox.  If same string as in a previous search is used, press the arrow of the Combo Box and select from the list.

Word search: This option is possible only when the string consists of only alphabetical letters.  Spaces before and after the input string are regarded as also a part of string to be searched.  However, spaces inside the string are ignored, so "this is" and "thisis" is regarded as the same string.

Case-sensitive search: If this checkbox is off, the string search does not distinguish uppercase and lowercase letters of one-byte characters.

In "Property Sheets->[Search]", you can specify how to highlight the found string on the preview display.  (By default, the string is shown in red .)  Also you can specify the fonts to be ignored by -sFont:

Remark: The string to be searched should consist only of usual letters and some signs.  If Windows system supports Japanese, it isn't allowed to contain a character whose code is larger than 127 and smaller than 257.

Remark: If the first character of the specified string is a space, the string following it is considered to be an anchor of HyperTeX or a source special.
For example "_#name1" is an anchor of HyperTeX with the label name1 and "_235_foo.tex" is the 235-th line of foo.tex in source specials (Here _ represents a space).
Moreover the string in the 235-th line of foo.tex can be indicated by / after line number.  For example, "_235/This book_foo.tex" means to search the string "This book" corresponding to the 235-th line in foo.tex.
It is also possible to be "_235_*" as a source special.
Moreover "_235" means the 235-th page and  following after the character '=', URL can be written as "_=http://akagi.ms.u-tokyo.ac.jp"


String Copy

By clicking the left button of mouse with SHIFT key pressed, you can get a string pointed by the mouse in a Preview window. A dialog box appears, and the string is copied.

The [Copy] button (or Space or Enter key) copies the string to the Windows clipboard.

The [Add] button makes the string longer, whereas the [Delete] button makes it shorter.  For English texts, these buttons usually adds or deletes one word at a time.

The [Full] button displays the full string to be copied (about 3000 letters).  Another [Add] here lets you return to the original state.

You can edit the copied strings on the dialog box.  The [Copy] button or the right button on the mouse copies the string to the clipboard.

If the edit box contains the name of a local file, the [Execute] button starts the application associated to the extension of the file.  If it contains a URL such as http://akagi.ms.u-tokyo.ac.jp/, then a hyperjump to the specified web page is executed.

Note: Symbols (and two-byte sequence for NTT JTeX) may be acquired incorrectly.  If you don't like these, just edit or remove them on the dialog box (cf. -sFont:).

Note: Click the left button while pressing both CTRL and SHIFT keys displays information on the character.


Presentation Mode

Under Presentation Mode, dvi files are displayed on the whole screen with no frame.  The shape of mouse cursor is normally an arrow in this mode. [ESC] key is the switch to move to or quit from this mode. The mouse coursor is only displayed when it is moved.

One of the followings is indicated as Presentation type:

general screen: general background and sheet(default)
white screen: white background and sheet, black letters
black screen: black background and sheet, white letters
white background: white background
black background: black background

Execpt for the case under general screen, white screen or black screen, the screen may flickers by the page jump or the usage of Loupe.

Under Presentation Mode, Display -> Size -> Fit, Full([5], [6] key in default) will be performed exactly both by shrinking with gray scale and by shrinking/enlarging with -e: and -varf:  In this case, the usage of the TrueType fonts may be better in place of PK fonts.

Use Presentation -> Cut edge to cut spaces around the edges of the pages.  Display -> Region -> On, Cut and Option -> Setup parameters -> [Paper] are also useful for this purpose.

In the presentation, for example, check View -> Seamless Hyperjump, push [ESC], use the above Fit or Full.

Checking Display -> Y-two pages, one can seamlessly and vertically scroll pages.  It will be used under Dipllay -> Full.

One can draw lines by the mouse (cf. Key on Presentation).

By cover sheet, one can hide some part of sheet and move it by the mouse. pause special can be used for this purpose.

In a presentation proceeded by [Space] key, one can dinamically hide or replace some parts of a sheet by dviout specials `+<levels>.

By SHIFT+F1 the list of Key functiuons is shown.
By SHIFT+F12 allows to set the functions (move pages/draw lines/cover sheet) using Menu.

Moreover the usage of Display -> cross pages, 16 pages ([8], [9] key in default) is usefull.  In this case, the page clicked by the right button of the mouse will be dispalyed in the normal size.

One may also use dviout specials in HyperTeX specials.

Remark: When one moves into Presentation Mode, the value of -cmode: changes into replace(def) if it has been auto mode(p2).  On the oher hande, when one quits from Presentation Mode, the values of the parameters -BMP: -e: -varf: -cmode: recover even if they change in Presentation Mode.

The default setting of the Presentation Mode can be changed and saved by Presentation Menu.


cover sheet

By cheking View ->cover sheet in Menu Bar, one can hide a page under Presentation Mode. One of the folllowing cover type is indicated.

bottom: cover bottom
right: cover right side
left: cover left side
bottom + right: cover bottom and right side
bottom + left: cover bottom and left side

At first, the whole page is hidden by a cover sheet. The cover sheet can be moved by the mouse or by using pause special. If one moves to the former page, then the page has no cover sheet and the status of the original page is kept.

1. Under pressing the left button of Mouse, change the shape of the mouse cursor into the up-down/right-left arrow by clicking the right button of the mouse if necessary. If the whole page is in a screen, the clicking is unnecessary.

If the boundary of the cover sheet is in the screen, the cursor jumps to the position. Then moving the mouse under pressing the left button of the mouse implies the moving of the cover sheet. If releaseing the left button of the mouse, the mouse corsor jumps to the original position.

2. If \special{pause} is written in the source text of TeX, the clicking [Space] key moves the cover sheet to the position where the special is written.

The click of [Space] key implies to move the cover sheet to the next position where \special{pause} is written. If there exist no \special{pause} after there in the page and there exists a part hidden by the cover sheet, the cover sheet will be moved to the position no part of the page will be  hidden.
On the other hand, if there exists no \special{pause} after there in the page and there exists no part hidden by the cover sheet, then the next page is shown.
Then the cover sheet is at the first position indicated by the first \special{pause} in the next page or the whole page is hidden by the cover sheet (or no part is hidden under On for Pause) if there exists no \special{pause} there.

See an example of the usage of pause special.

3. Special functions are attached to the following function keys uner Presentation Mode(The functions can be attached to other keys [Key]).

F5 On : Use cover sheet
F6 Off : Don't use cover sheet
F7 Suspend : Suspend to use cover sheet
F8 Return : Return to the place where the original cover sheet exists
F9 On for Pause : Similar as F5 but the cover sheet is at the position where no part of the page is hidden if no \dviout{pause} exists in the page.

By the above Suspend, the current place is recorded as "the place where the original cover sheet exists"

Under suspending to use cover sheet, if the place to display coincides with "the place where the original cover sheet exists", then the cover sheet is again used and the suspension is stopped.

The above Return means to return to "the place where the original cover sheet exists" and to stop the suspension.

The above OFF or jump by HyperTeX is done after performing the above Suspend.

Remark: Turning the wheel of IntelliMouse with pressing it means to move to anothe page (cf.Q_V12).  In this case, if the left mouse button is also pressed, then the movement to the next page can be done without suspending the cover sheet, that is the same result as clicking [Space] key.

Remark: Successive pushing of [Space] key for a dvi file without any \special{pause} under Presentation Mode with the cover sheet implies the following change of the preview:
a page hidden by the cover sheet -> no part of the page is hidden by the cover sheet -> the next page is shown with covered by the cover sheet ->...
If On for Pause is used, the avove "page is shown with covered by the cover sheet" is skipped.


pause special
For example, \special{pause} is used in TeX as follows.

% Keep the page size
\special{dviout `keep y}
% Screen 800 x 600: draw off, white screen
% bottom cover sheet On for Pause
% Presentation mode; wait
% draw on, Fit screen
\special{dviout -y=SVGAP !AN0N5NP!p;!bdf}
...
\special{pause}% the place to pause
...
\special{pause}% the place to pause
...

In this case, if the corresponding dvi file is previewed from the first page, it is shown in Presentation Mode.  The clickings of [Space]key moves the cover sheet to the position indicated by \special{pause}.

One can indicate in TeX source so that, for example, the paper size equals 8 inch x 6 inch.


Key on Presentation
In the Presetation Mode, the following are defined on keys.

ESC: ON/Off of the Presentation Mode.
5: Fit,  6: Full,  9: 16 pages (-> right button of the mouse to the page)
CTRL+SHIFT+Arrow key: Adjust the displayed part of a page by 0.5pt = 0.176mm.
ALT+X: Quit dviout.
SHIFT+F1:  List of Key functions
SHIFT+F12: A menu moving pages and setting functions on drawing lines and a cover sheet.  [+] changes its shape and [-] moves the menu to the right bottom corner and then the menu only appears when the cursor comes to the location of the menu.

Draw Lines
F12: ON/OFF of the function of drawing lines.
SHIFT+left button of Mouse: Define the stating point.
SHIFT+right button of the mouse: Define the end/intermidiate point.
CTRL+SHIFT+left button of the mouse: Change the last starting point.
CTRL+SHIFT+right button of the mouse: Change the last end point.
Delete:    Delete the last point/line.
F11:       Draw lines(default)
SHIFT+F11: Draw boxes
SHIFT+F5:  red(default), define at the starting point.
SHIFT+F6:  black
SHIFT+F7:  blue
SHIFT+F8:  green
SHIFT+F9:  thick/thin

Display control
CTRL+U: On (dviout specials `+<levels>)
CTRL+V: Off
CTRL+N: reNew

cover sheet
F5 On : Use cover sheet
F6 Off : Don't use cover sheet
F7 Suspend : Suspend to use cover sheet
F8 Return : Return to the place where the original cover sheet exists
F9 On for Pause : Similar as F5 but the cover sheet is at the position where no part of the page is hidden if no \dviout{pause} exists in the page.
Move mouse under pressing Left (+ Right) button of mouse: Move cover sheet.

If Presentation->Use Mouse Button->Left, Right is checked, the left/right button of the mouse has a function of [Space].


Embedding into DVI file

1. Operations of dviout or parameters of dviout can be embed into a DVI file by dviout specials.  Information on the locations in the original TeX file is also embeded into it by source specials.  For Presentation Mode one may use pause special.

2. dviout supports an original Extended DVI file where any files can be embedded.  Using dviadd.exe, one can embed files int a DVI file or extract them from the DVI file.

2.1. dviout specials \special{dviout `initialize ... } which initialize dviout will be automatically recognized by dviout if only the parts ... are written in the file initial.par separated by lines and if the file is embedded in the DVI file.  Here the lines starting with # are ignored. For example, the contents of
 initial.par are

 # This is a test.
  `keep TEXPK
  +TEXPK=^F/^s.tfm; -y=A4L

In particular, if the line starting with #rem exists the following lines are ignored until the line starting with #end appeares.

2.2. The fonts and images used by a DVI file can be automatically embedded into the DVI file and they will be automatically used by dviout(cf. Font/Image Embedding).

2.3. The usual dviware ignore these embedded files but dviout recognizes these files as Image data files included by graphic specials or target files of HyperTeX specials corresponding to <a href="file:..."> or font files indicated by ^F/ in -TEXPK:
Similarly the parameters -ftt: -vfn: etc. can use the embedded files by indicating ^F/<filename>.

For example, suppose foo.dvi uses myfig.ps under graphics package of LaTeX2e as follows

\usepackage{graphicx}
...
\includegraphics*[height=6cm]{myfig.ps}

We can embed myfig.ps into foo.dvi by

dviadd myfig.ps foo

and then dviout can directly handle this foo.dvi without myfig.ps.

If files are embedded in the DVI file being displayed, their list is shown by Help->information/Buffer Info.

Under other OS, the command dviadd can be also valid by having compiled the source file dviadd.c. Using the command dviadd x ... preceeding to execute a dviware, the dviware can handle the extended DVI file as dviout.

Note. A packing in a tar file can be used for the similar purpose.  Moreover gzipped files with the extension .gz obtained from these files are also supported if the command gzip -d ... works.


Extended DVI file
1. pTeX developed by ASCII corp supports vertical writing together with horisontal writing.  The DVI file containing vertical writing is as follows

The last part of the DVI file are some bytes with value 243 and the value of the preceeding byte equals 3 (which is 2 in the usual case).  In the page description part, the code 255 with the next code is the switch for the vertival or horizontal writing.

2. dviout supports Embedding into DVI files for any files. Embedded files are put between the page description part and PostAmbre in DVI file as follows.

PRE(247)
...           % PreAmbre
BOP(139)
...           % the first page
EOP(140)
...
BOP(139)
...           % the last page
EOP(140)
 POST(248)
 data         % contents of num_add files
 file_name[]  % num_add filenames(array of NULL terminated strings)
 pt_data[num_add][bod[4], lod[4]]
              % num_add pairs of the top address and length of the contens of files
 bof[4]       % the top address of file_name[]
 eof[4]       % the end address of file_name[] + 1
 num_add[4]   % the number of embedded files
 top_add[4]   % the top address of POST at the head of added part
 AdID[3]      % 'A', 'd', 'O'   : ID
 EOP(140)
POST(248)
...           % PostAmbre
POST_POST(249)
top_post[4]   % the address of POST at the head of PostAmbre
2 or 3, 223,...,223


tar file
dviout can read a DVI file in a packing of a tar file whose extension is usually .tar.  dviout can read graphic files to be included or target files of HyperTeX in the packing.

The directory structure in the packing is ignored.

If the extension of the packing is .dvitar and for example, if the filename is foo.dvitar, then dviout searches the file foo.dvi in the packing to display it.  Otherwise, the files with the extension .dvi are regarded as DVI files.


dviout specials

dviout can use the special

\special{dviout <macro>}

in a DVI file to change paramaters of dviout and operations of dviout.  This is valid only in the normal preview (is not valid in printing or displaying 4/16 pages at a time etc.)

This function is also available under HyperTeX specials.

1. The above <macro> is the same as variables of the functions [ValueSet(parameter=value)]  or [Function(key)] of DDE in Link to Other Program.
Here the sign - should be put preceeding to the parameter in the first case to be distingushed to the latter.

For example,

\special{dviout -y=A6L fn}

Here the key operation(key) which may affect the execution of the macro and its definition or which should be executed after displaying a page, should be written in small letters. For example, it is in the case when key corresponds to the move to the next page and when there exists a dviout special in the page.

In dvips one can use
\special{papersize=<width>,<height>}
to indicate the paper size.  dviout interprets this as
\special{dviout -y=F<width>:<height>P}
This special will be ignored in a DVI file after it is once interpreted.  For example, one may write
\special{papersize=21cm,19.7cm}
and also one can indicate <parameter> in -y=<parameter> such as \special{papersize=A4L}.
If this is indicated as
\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=210mm,197mm}}
in the top page, it is interpreted even if dviout starts from a later page.  One may also write as \AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\the\paperheight,\the\paperwidth}}

2. Under the form \special{dviout `key parameter} several functions are supported.  key is allowed to be timer, href, keep,  restore, message, ask, input, in, in*, sp or initialize.

2.1. \special{dviout `timer number}
Wait number/1000 before executing the successive dviout specials.  If the preview moves to another page or dvi file, waited dviout specials are canceled.
The successive dviout specials can be write after number separated by a space

For example, write

\special{dviout `timer 60000}
\special{dviout Je}

in the every page execpt for the last and write

\special{dviout `timer 60000}
\special{dviout Jt}

in the last page.  Then the every page is shown for 60 second succeccively without the end.
We may write as

\special{dviout `timer 60000 Jt}

2.2. \special{dviout `wait}
This is equivalent to \special{dviout `timer 0} and means to wait the execution of the next dviout special until the former ones have been completed. Moreover a series of dviout specials

\special{dviout <macro>}
\special{dviout `wait}
\special{dviout ....}

can be unified as

\special{dviout <macro> ; ....}

2.3. `"....."`
dviout specials except `timer can be one block surrounded by `" and "`.
By this dviout specials are unified to one \special. `wait is automatically inserted between the blocks.
For example, under myhyper.sty

\href{dviout:`"`href file:foo.mid"` `href file:foo.dvi}{jump to foo}

2.4. \special{dviout `href parameters}
parameters is equivalent to parameters in \special{html:<a href="parameters">}.  But parameters with the head dviout: is ignored.
One can use this in HyperTeX as follows.

\special{html:<a href="dviout: -y=A4L ;`href file:foo.dvi">}
Jump to foo
\special{html:</a>}

2.5. \special{dviout `keep parameter list}
Keep the current values of paramater list and automatically recover them when the current dvi file is closed.  For example

\special{dviout `keep y BMP}

They are also recovered by \special{dviout `restore}.  Once parameters are kept, another \special{dviout `keep ...} is ignored unless they are recovered.

2.6. \special{dviout `message <MESSAGE>}
<MESSAGE> is displayed in Information Window.
<MESSAGE> can be a block surrounded by `' and '`.  The block can be devided to lines by the separator `'. If there exist more than one line, the first line becomes a title and the following lines are contents.
For example,

\special{dviout `mesage `'Remark`'Written by foo`'Jan. 2000'`}

2.7. \special{dviout `ask `'<MESSAGE>'` `yes ... `no ...}
The dialog including <MESSAGE> is displayed and request to answer Yes or No.
If Yes is answered and `yes exists, the dviout specials following `yes are executed until `no or the end of the \special.  For example, under myhyper.sty

\href{dviout:`ask `'direction`'Landscape'` `yes -y=A4L fn `no -y=A4P fn}{Change direction}

2.8. \special{dviout `input <string>}
The content of Clipboard is replaced (added if ALT is pressed) by <string>.
If `in is used in plcae of `input, two succeeding hexadecimal letters following a space characer are replaced by the charater with the code.  Moreover two continuous spaces are replaced by one space.  Hence even number of continuous space characters are replaced by the half number of spaces.
If the top of <string> is . and two hexadecimal letters follows after it, then they are replaced by the charater with the code. If the top of <string> is .., it is replaced by ..
These replacements following a space and . are ignored if `input0 is used in place of `input.
If `in* is used in place of `in, then <string> is not displayed in the preview window.
This dviout special is usefull if it is used together with HyperTeX (<string> is copied in the clipboard by the click of a hotspot).
In this case, if CTRL is pressed, it can be copied to an specified editor.  Moreover if CTRL+ALT is pressed, the editor can be redefined.

2.9. \special{dviout `+<levels>}
Control the output after this command in this page.  If <levels> is empty, the output is stopped. If <levels> equals -, the output becomes valid.

<levels> can be written as -2, 4-5, 7- and if the level is in this region, the output is valid. Here -2 means 0-2 and 7 means the level equals or larger than 7. The level start from 0 and it increases by one when [SPACE] key is pushed.
Moreover m means the maximal level appeared up to this point and M means the level + 1.  The successive M with the number n means the level + n and that of m means the level - n + 1.

If dviout jumps to a former page, the level is regarded to be sufficiently large.  Then if reNew button (default:CTRL+N) is pushed, the page is shown with the level 0.

2.10. \special{dviout `sp <special>}
Execute the TeX special <special>

2.11. \special{dviout `initialize <macro>}
If this special is put at the top of a dvi file, it is always performed when this dvi file is read by dviout even if the start page is not the top page.
If the option word page is written after 'initialize, it is always performed at the top of each page.
This special with <macro> is ignored if it is not at the top of a dvi file.
To execute again this special defined at the top of a dvi file, indicate as follows

\special{dviout `initialize}

For example, to define this dviout special at the top of a dvi file, write as follows at the top of the first page

\AtBeginDvi{\special{dviout `initialize -y=B5L}}
\AtBeginDvi{\special{dviout `initialize page `sp background Yellow}}

Moreover the parameters -TEXPK: -TEXFONTS: -TEXKNJ: -gdat: whose values may have several pathnames can be intialized by appending some new pathnames.  It is indicated by using + inplace of -.
If the new pathenames begins with ;, then the original pathnames are appended to the new ones. Otherwise the new pathnames should be terminated by ; and the new pathnames are appended to the original pathnames.
They are checked not to append the same pathnames as in the original ones.  This function using + should be initialize one parameter in one \special.  For example,

\AtBeginDvi{\special{dviout `initialize `keep TEXPK}}
\AtBeginDvi{\special{dviout `initialize +TEXPK=^F/^s.pk;^F/^s.tfm;}}

These specials to intialize dviout can be embedded in a DVI file if they are written in a file named initial.par (cf. Embedding into DVI file).


source specials

dviout interprets source specials supported by MikTeX and yap or pTeX (recent version).  Using the specials, dviout calls an editor to edit the part pointed by the mouse coursor and conversely dviout can display the part whose source file and the line number are indicated.
source special is embedded in a DVI file as follows:

\special{src:line_number source_file_name}

1. dviout calls an editor to edit the source file
The way to call an editor is given by -src: which is indicated in Setup Parameters->[Common]. For example

c:\usr\local\bin\mule.exe^s+%d %s

is the content of -src:.  Here %s represents the file name of the TeX file (full path) and %d represents the line number. %s may be replaced by %n which represents the path name without its extension.
^s is the separator between the program to be executed and its parameters.

If the chracter < is put at the top, then dviout is minimized after calling an editor:

<c:\usr\local\bin\mule.exe^s+%d %s

If emacs/mule/meadow is used under gnuserv package, one can indicate as

gnuclientw^s +%d %s

To use the package put the contained executable files in a directory in PATH and gnuserv.el in a lisp directory, byte-compile it by the command M-x byte-compile-file and add the two lines

(require 'gnuserv)
(gnuserv-start)

in $HOME/.emacs.

To execute DDE command, the string combined with the service name, the topic name and the string to export by XTYP_EXECUTE transaction separated by a space in this order shoud be indicated by following the top character `.
It is terminated by another ` and the command to be executed when the DDE server is not registered in DDEML is given after that.  For example,

`myedit myedit [dviout(+%d %s)]`c:\Program Files\myedit.exe^s+%d %s

If the second ` is replaced by ``, the first DDE command is executed after the execution of the second command if the DDE server is not registered in DDEML.  In this case, the second command registers the DDE server in DDEML.
More than one XTYP_EXECUTE transactions may be indicated with the separator | as follows

`myedit myedit Open(%s)|Line(%d)``myedit

If no DDE command is indicated, dviout inserts

`srctex srctex %s: %d

at the top of -src: when dviout interprets -src:

If -src: is void and the environment variable TEXEDIT is set, the environment variable is used for -src:

1.1. The double click of the left button on the mouse results the jump to the source file according to -src: (it may fail if the shape of the mouse corsor is not an arrow).
Moreover String Copy is done by clicking the left button of the mouse under pressing SHIFT key.
In this case, if source specials are set,  [Execute] button is changed into [->Src] button and pressing the button results the jump to the source file according to -src:.  This step is omitted if Jump->DireCt Jump to Editor is checked.
If -src: is not void and %d or %s do not exist in -src:, a text in a tag jump format is displayed.
This function is killed by Option->source specials

1.2. Clicking the right button of the mouse under pressing both the CTRL key and the left button of the mouse results the similar jump to the source file as above.
In this case, only the vertical position (or horizontal position in vertical mode) is considered, jumped position may not be accurate in case of a multi-column page etc.

2. Jump in dviout using source specials
As the jump by HyperTeX, dviout can display a page by indicating #line_number tex_file_name or #line_number/string tex_file_name.  In the command line, one can input, for example,

dviout -1 foo.dvi "# 235 foo.tex"

Here -1 means the first dviout (cf. Start and Exit and no more dviout). Here the extension .dvi cannot be omitted.  Moreover

dviout -1 foo.dvi "# 235/This foo.tex"

says that dviout should indicate the word "This" in 235-th line in foo.tex (The last search of dviout determine that this search of
"This" is done as a word or not).  If one wants to search the block "This book", then one inputs

dviout -1 foo.dvi "# 235/This book foo.tex"

(The last part in "# ... " is the filename of the source text).

In case of DDE(Link to Other Program), one can set

[PageOpen(# 235 foo.tex)]

If the file name is *, the check of the file name is skipped. If the file name contains a space then it should be braced by ' such as 'My Docments\foo.tex'

One can jump from an editor editing the source file to the preview window of dviout to show the corresponding lines indicated in the source text. For example, the macro to do this jump from Hidemaru to dviout is as follows:

ddeinitiate "dviout", "dviout";
ddeexecute "[PageOpen(# "+str(lineno)+" *)]";
ddeexecute "[FileOpen("+leftstr(filename,strlen(filename)-3)+"dvi)]";

Here we suppose the full path name of the corresponding DVI file is only different in the extension from that of the TeX source file.  Note that the spaces in the above strings "[PageOpen(# " and " *)]" (cf. Example Using DDE).

It is also possible to indicate it directly by String Search such as _235_foo.tex or _235_*. Here _ represents a space.

3. Make a DVI file with source specials
If the TeX compiler support source specials, a DVI file with source specials is made by the -src option:

latex --src foo

By the attached srctex one can make a DVI file with source specials by a TeX compiler which doesn't support them.  It can be done, for example, by

srctex latex foo

or

srctex -a latex foo

in place of

latex foo

In this case, srctex transforms foo.tex into foo.tmp and calls latex to make foo.dvi.  The -a option generates more precise information but there increses the possibility to fail in generating a DVI file and the size of the DVI file becomes bigger.
To edit foo.tex in case of the error in making foo.dvi, an attached utility convedit can be used.  If

TEXEDIT=convedit emacs +%d "%s"

is set in the TeX environment, the command

convedit emacs +123 foo.tmp

is interpreted as

emacs +123 foo.tex.

To transform foo.tex into a TeX file fo1.tex containing source specials, execute

srctex -ofo1.tex foo

The following is a command to make a DVI file by latex fo2 after this transformation

srctex -ifoo.tex -ofo1.tex latex fo2

For more information on srctex, please refere to the message displayed by executing srctex and the attached configulation file srctex.cfg.


Font/Image Embedding

Characters in Fonts used in the current DVI are extracted and embedded into the current DVI file by File->Font Embedding.  The fonts are embedded in the name dviout.etf and it can be removed from the DVI file by dviadd(Attached Programs) or by the buttons:

[Strip Font]: Delete all the embedded fonts.
[Strip All]:  Delete all the embedded files.

Moreover the image data files used in the DVI file can be also embedded.

dviadd.exe should be in the directory of the current dviout.

The information on embedded fonts in a DVI file is obtained by Help->Embedding Fonts or more precisely by etfdump(Attached Programs).

Remark: In the case of the distribution of a DVI file with embedded fonts, the embedded fonts should be allowed to do so by the maker of the fonts.

The following can be embedded by File->Font/Image Embedding:

1. Image data files
The image data files indicated in the TeX file to be used are embedded.

2. European TrueType Fonts(The fonts are marked as TT under Font Information) with data from the tfm file.
Indicate the fonts in -TEXPK: (for example, c:\windows\fonts\^s.ttf) and corresponding tfm files in -TEXFONTS: (for example, ^r\tfm\\ ).
Usually the character codes 0c00-0x20 and 0x7f in TeX are transformed according to the rule used in BaKoMa fonts.  If there exist some specifications in the font mapping file given by -ftt:, the corresponding data are also embedded.

3. Japanese TrueType Fonts(The fonts rendered by dviout through the font configulation file) with an information from the jfm file.
The fonts are defined in the configulation file indicated by -vfn: in [JFont2].  The font index files with the extension .tti should have been created by ttindex.exe(Attached Programs) for the Japanese TrueType fonts with the extension *.ttf or *.tti.
The dada extracted from jfm files and the font files are embedded.

4. Virtual Fonts(VF/OVF)
The extracted data from virtual fonts are embedded.

5. Font Map/tfm/jfm(related data for the TrueType fonts under WinAPI)
Font Map is the data indicated by the file given by -ftt:.
The extracted data from tfm files are embedded but the whole jfm files are embedded without multiplication (which are checked not by the file names but by comparing the necessary data in the files).
Inner JFM(-Jfm:) and the setting in [WinJFont] are not embedded.

6. PK Fonts
The embedding can be done under several resolutions (by indication the resolutions in dpi such as 300 450 600 separated by spaces).  The closest resolution is used by dviout and the fonts are rescaled if it is necessary.

7. initial.par(cf. Embedding into DVI file)
Parameters to initialize dviout are embedded. If initial.par is checked, the contents in the Window below are embedded.  In this case, if the Window is empty and the embedded initial.par exists, it will be removed.  If initial.par is unchecked, there will be no change.

Example 1. European TrueType Fonts (test_a4x.dvi)
Put BaKoMa fonts in ^w\fonts\^s.ttf and insert ^w\fonts\^s.ttf; at the top of the value of -TEXPK: and set -TEXFONTS:^r\tfm\\  and then embed fonts.

To embed all fonts with the related data to ^r\doc\ttnfss\sample.dvi contained in winttf.zip, set -ftt:^w\map\ttfexp.map together with the above setting and check Virtual Font, Font Map/tfm/jfm, TrueType Font.
In this case, if one wants to avoid embedding of the TrueType fonts such as Times New Roman, set -ftt:^x\map\ttfonts.map as usual and do not change -TEXPK: and check only Virtual Font, Font Map/tfm/jfm.

2. European and Japanese TrueType Fonts (tex_b5x.dvi)
Put GT font file gt20001.ttf in ^w\fonts, make gt20001.tti by ttindex.exe, comment out the line 1, ^w\fonts\msmincho in ^x\utility\dviout1.vfn, erace # at the top of the line #1, ^w\fonts\gt20001 there to validate it, set -vfn:^x\utility\dviout1.vfn
and do similarly as in the first part of Example 1.
Moreover check initial.par to arrange the size of the sheet of the page.


Installation

To run dviout for Windows, you need files of dviout.exe, dviout.hlp and dviout.cnt (or/and dvioute.hlp and dvioute.cnt for HELP in English).
These files must be placed in the same directory (it is desirable to avoid the path name including space characters).

To display or print a TeX dvi file, dviout for Windows needs font files.  If the resolution (dpi) does not match your printer's resolution, the printing result would not be proper.

Dviout must know the resolution and the location of the font.  These are described by the dviout parameters -dpi:, -TEXROOT: and -TEXPK: (and if necessary, -F:, -L:, etc.).

If the required font files are provided and these Parameters are set properly, ([Guess] button is available to automatically set -TEXROOT:, -TEXPK:, and -F:), the dvi file can be displayed in a Windows view.

These settings above, Associating dvi files with dviout, and registering dviout in the start menu can be done by selecting "Option -> Install".

The -BMP: parameter adjusts the view size or the contrast, and sets them as defaults.

If the dvi file can be displayed in a Windows view, printing would be also possible. If the printed position on the paper is not proper, it is necessary to adjust the offsets in the printing position. These are adjusted by the -LM: and -TM: parameters.

As in the former MS-DOS version of dviout, it is possible to describe these parameters in a file dviout.par(which should be in the same directory containing dviout.exe).

However, it is more recommended to set various parameters from the dviout.exe because a wider variety of settings are possible as described below. (For example, the parameters are automatically changed when printing.)

In addition, Associating dvi files with dviout would be useful.

The font files needed in the commonly used environments are as follows.

1. European language PK Font Glyph File with a name like cmr10.300pk (The number 300 denotes the resolution (in dpi) of the font.  This must match your printer's resolution when printing.
Usually the fonts with resolutions 1.2 and 1.2^2 times as high as the base resolution, cmr10.360pk and cmr10.432pk in this case, are also required.)
If the corresponding TrueType fonts exist, they can be used in place of PK fonts.

2. When using ASCII Japanese TeX, the Japanese font metric files (jfm file) are required (standard jfm files such as min10.tfm etc. are implemented in dviout).
Even if the European language PK font file does not exist, the missing PK font can be created by Automatic Font Generation function of the dviout.  (When the MakeTeXPK is supported, see Q_F6.)

1. Setting the Resolution
2. Setting the Font Path
3. Adjusting the Display Scale
4. Adjusting the Print Position
5. Associating dvi files with dviout

Note: On multi-user machines such as Windows NT,  the individual settings for each user are also possible besides the common default settings(Q_S6).

Note: In addition, if you want to import Image data files or print out using Japanese font in LBP, some useful information can be found in Q&A and Contents.


Setting the Resolution

0. The default resolution is 300 dpi.  If you want use this value, it is not necessary to specify the resolution value explicitly.

1. Property Sheets appears in "Option -> Setup Parameters". Then select the [Resolution] sheet (see [Help]).

2. Input the value of the resolution -dpi: which matches the font resolution (dpi) (type the keyboard or using the arrow button on the sheet).

Usually, this value must match your printer's resolution. On the other hand, the preview display has a lower resolution, so the font resolution is reduced and converted to a gray scale in the preview display.  (When a display without reduction, 118 dpi is often used.)

3. Press [Save] to register to the Registry,  then the new resolution value will be used in the next session of the dviout.  (cf. Q_S1).

4. Press [Apply] to reflect the settings in the current session of the dviout.

Note: The resolution written in the catalog of the printer is sometimes imaginary and larger than real one.  The real resolutions that the Windows printer driver supports are those which can be selected in Quality: in Print dialog box.

Note: Usually, it is not necessary to specify the value of -dpiv:.


Setting the Font Path

The parameter -TEXPK: specifies the paths of the fonts used by dviout.  In addition, when -TEXROOT: is used, the description in -TEXPK: can be shortened. In a certain situation, specifying the -L: would be necessary.

1. Select "Option -> Setup Parameters -> [Font]" (see [Help]).

2. Set -TEXPK:.  If you have several font paths which include the partially common path, you can use the  -TEXROOT: parameter. The common part in -TEXPK: can be written with ^r .

See "Examples of TEXPK Settings".

Remarks: If you press the [Guess] button, the dviout will guess and search for the font file. Then, the settings of -TEXROOT:, -TEXPK:, and -L: (and -F: depending in some cases) described in 2 above are set automatically.
If you are asked the question displayed, carefully answer "Yes" or "No".
This font path guessing function would be failed if the resolution is not specified correctly nor the basic fonts are not installed.  This function works only for the European language PK font file, the Japanese jxl4font, the Japanese font metric jfm file, and the GTH Font Library.

3. Font Check: Use "[Check] " to check whether the font path setting is correct.

4. Press [Save] to register to Registry that will be referred in the next session of dviout (cf. Q_S1).

5. Press [Apply] to apply the new font path settings to the current dviout session.


Examples of TEXPK Settings

Example 1.
In the case of the most common TeX system with kpathsearch and the environment variable TEXMFMAIN or TEXMF, the specification in -TEXROOT: and -TEXPK: would be

-TEXROOT:^T\fonts
-TEXPK:^r\pk\\^s.^dpk;^r\tfm\\^s.tfm;^r\vf\\^s.vf

Here ^T, ^r, \\, ^s and ^d correspond to the environment variable TEXMFMAIN or TEXMF, the parameter  -TEXROOT:, any sequence of directory names, the font name and the resolution, respectively.
Under this setting it is slow to start dviout at the first time but it will be faster from the next time because of the cashing of the location of fonts(cf.-Fkeep:).
PK fonts, TrueType fonts and Virtual fonts are indicated in this order(cf.-TEXPK:). If you want to use different types of PK fonts according to printers, you should replace the first part of -TEXPK: by, for example,
    ^r\pk\cx\\^s.^dpk;^r\pk\modeless\\^s.^dpk.
If European Language TrueType Fonts are registered, they will be used.
If you want them to have priority over PK fonts, move ^r\tfm\\^s.tfm at the top of -TEXPK:. Virtual fonts are also supported(-virtual:).  In case of Omega, ^r\ovf\\^s.ovf will be indicated.
If Virtual fonts are used for Japanese fonts, use ^r\tfm\\^s^tfm in place of ^r\tfm\\^s.tfm.  For example,
-TEXPK:^r\tfm\\^s^tfm;^r\pk\\^s.^dpk;^r\vf\\^s.vf;^r\tfm\\^s.tfm;
If some fonts exist under e:\myfonts in the same way as under ^T\fonts and both fonts will be used, then we may indicate

-TEXROOT:e:\myfonts;^T\fonts

Here the former e:\myfonts has the priority to the latter.

Example 2.
In the case when you have all the European language fonts in c:\tex\texmf\fonts\pk, for example, the path for 300 dpi in cmbx10 is
    c:\tex\texmf\fonts\pk\cmbx10.300pk
and the jfm file Japanese font in c:\tex\texmf\fonts\public\ptex\tfm, for example, for min8 as in
   c:\tex\texmf\fonts\public\ptex\tfm\min8.tfm
then the specification in -TEXROOT: and -TEXPK: would be

-TEXROOT:c:\tex\texmf\fonts
-TEXPK:^r\pk\^s.^dpk;^r\public\ptex\tfm\^s.tfm

In this case, other font files, for example, the font file for the 360dpi of lcircle10 should be found as
c:\tex\texmf\fonts\pk\lcircle10.360pk.

Example 3.
In the case when the paths of your European language PK fonts files are like
    c:\tex\fonts\cm\dpi300\cmbx10.pk
and
    c:\tex\fonts\latex\dpi360\lcircle1.pk
(cmbx100 of 300 dpi font and lcirclie10 of 360 dpi font), and the Japanese font metric jfm file is in the same manner as the first Example 1, then

-TEXROOT:c:\tex\fonts
-TEXPK:^r\cm\dpi^d\^s.pk;^r\latex\dpi^d\^s.pk;c:\tex\texmf\fonts\public\ptex\tfm\^s.tfm
cut long name: last part (-L: 0)

Note: -TEXPK: above can be set to

-TEXPK:^r\\dpi^d\^s.pk;c:\tex\texmf\fonts\public\ptex\tfm\^s.tfm

(\\ is replaced by a directory name of any length.)  However, if \\ is used and -Fkeep: is OFF(particularly, when used from a location near the root directory), the font search takes time, and starting dviout becomes slow.

Example 4.
In the case when you have European Language TrueType Fonts like cmr10, cmr8 and  European language PK fonts like
    c:\tex\fonts\pk\msbm10.300pk
then TrueType Fonts are specified in Property Sheets->[WinJFont] (individual specification is unnecessary by using edefault)and the corresponding tfm files are indicated by -TEXPK:
But any tfm file which is not corresponding to a TrueType font is better not to be matched in -TEXPK:
It is recommended to make a new directory, copy tfm files for TrueType fonts in a special directory and indicated them in -TEXPK:
Suppose the tfm files are copied in c:\tex\fonts\ttf\tfm and Japanese font metric jfm files have the path names like
    c:\tex\fonts\jfm\min8.tfm
Then -TEXPK: would be

-TEXROOT:c:\tex\fonts
-TEXPK:c:^r\pk\^s.^dpk;^r\ttf\tfm\^s.tfm;^r\jfm\^s.tfm

Note: The end of -TEXPK: should not be replaced by  ^r\\^s.tfm.  (In addition to  c:\tex\fonts\pk\msbm10.300pk, c:\tex\fonts\tfm\msbm10.tfm also matches.)

Example 5.
In the case when your European language PK fonts are collected in the GTH Font Library at each resolution.
For example, the 300dpi cmbx10 is inserted with the file name of cmbx10.pk in the GTH font library c:\tex\fonts\dpi300.gth.
Also your Japanese jfm file are collected in the GTH font library of c:\tex\fonts\jfm.gth, then the specification in -TEXROOT: and -TEXPK: would be

-TEXROOT:c:\tex\fonts
-TEXPK:^r\dpi^d^g^s.pk;^r\jfm^g^s.tfm


Adjusting the Display Scale

If the resolution or the contrast on your Preview display is not proper, you can adjust them in  "Option -> Setup Parameters -> [Display]".

1. Adjust the Start: parameter of [Display].

Setting H-scale to 4 means a reduction to 1/4 in the horizontal direction.  If the dpi (setting in -dpi:) is 360, the resolution in the horizontal direction will be 360/4 = 90 dpi on your preview display.  Usually, it would be appropriate to select a value of 70 dpi -- 120 dpi with your display resolution.
The reduction of the resolution in the vertical direction is specified in V-scale.
If you want to reverse the lightness and the darkness on your screen, then check the reverse  box.
When the display resolution is reduced, the contrast can be adjusted by using the gray scale.

Note: In practice, when displaying a dvi file,  you can adjust the scale in preview display by " Display -> Size -> Magnify, Reduce " (can be set by using the tool bar buttons) and the contrast by "Display -> Contrast -> Blacker, Whiter ".
After these, the parameters in Start: of " Option -> Setup Parameters -> [Display] " are now assigned with the current values.  To carry out 2. below, it would be better to use these values .

2. Press [Save] to register to Registry (cf. Q_S1).

3. Press [Apply] to apply the settings to the current dviout session.


Adjusting the Print Position

0.  Print out some auxiliary dvi file (for example, test_org.dvi), then check the  printed position on the paper.  If the horizontal and vertical positions need to be adjusted, do the followings.

1. Select "Option -> Setup Parameters -> [Printer]" (see [Help]).

2. Uncheck the box of "Use default area for system drive" and press [OK]. Next, print out the auxiliary dvi file again and measure the length that should be corrected.

3. Again, select "Option -> Setup Parameters -> [Printer]" to set the length of the horizontal position that should be corrected in -LM: and the length of the vertical position that should be corrected in -TM: in units of 1/100 cm.  (51 means 5.1 mm.)

Initially, both are zero and probably the actual printed position would be offset down and to the right.  Then input these offset widths.   Increasing -LM: makes the print position move to the left, and increasing -TM: makes it move up.

If you want to print out in the landscape orientation, first you should check the offsets by print out, for example, test_org.dvi in the landscape orientation. Then, (press the [Setup] button in the print dialog to make the printing direction horizontal.)  specify the offset values in -RM: and -BM: for the vertical and horizontal direction, respectively.

4. Press [Save] to register to the Registry which is referred in the next dviout session (cf. Q_S1).

5. Press [Apply] to reflect the settings to the current session of the dviout.

Note: The printing position adjustment only for the temporary should be done by specifying -OX: and -OY:.


Associating dvi files with dviout

Although this is automatically set by "Option->Install", it can be set by the following operations.

Start Windows Explorer (Click "Start Menu->Program->Explorer" in Windows by the mouse) and select "Display->Option->File Type->Add" from the menu bar to move to the "Add New File Type" sheet.

Associating dviout to the dvi file.
Define dvi in the associated extension and add the description like DVI file in the type description.
If you select "Add" to move to the sheet for a new action, define open in the action, and select dviout.exe in the reference (double click on the left mouse button), then the dviout is defined in the application that executes the action.

Set the icon on the dvi file.
Press "OK" to return to the sheet for adding a new file and select the icon change.
Press "Reference" on the sheet for changing the icon and select dviout.exe (for example, double click the left mouse button).  Then select the icon you like and return to adding the new file type.  Press "Exit" and finally press "OK" in the option sheet in the Explorer to exit the setting.

When you double-click the dvi file icon by the mouse, the file is previewed by dviout(cf. no more dviout, -multi:).


Automatic Parameter Installation Function

1. If you install dviout with the TeX compiler, you might know the font locations and also their creation methods.  In this case, Installation dviout can be simpler, if the following dviout functions are used.

When dviout is started and the initial settings are completed, if the mode remains at 0 and does not change and -TEXPK: is not defined, the install.par file is searched for in the directory containing the dviout that was started.  If it exists, that file is regarded as the parameter file, read, and write these parameters to the Registry.

You can write parameters like -TEXPK: in install.par. This parameter file is only read during installation and is used for initial setting.  Refer to it when creating your install program.

2. dviout can read a parameter file from Option->Read Parameters.  If the name of parameter file begins with $_ such as $_myown.par, dviout also writes the parameters to the Registry when the file is read.
The lines starting with ;; or :` at the head of the file are for the explanation of the file and they are displayed when the file is reading. Other lines starting with ; are comment lines and they are ignored.
If the line starting with ;` is used, the choice to write the setting to the registry is also allowed.


Move

To move the display position, you can use the following methods:

 - Move in a page
 1. Scroll bar

 2. Dragging the left button in the hand-shaped mouse cursor

 3. The arrow keys on the keyboard

 4. [Home], [End] keys, etc.

 5. Turning the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel.

 - Page jump
 1. There are various page jumps from "Jump ->" and they are assigned to several keys.  You can redefined the key binding for frequently used functions by "Property Sheets->[Key]". You can also redefine the association of the buttons on tool bar for these functions.

 2. Use tool button to move to a previous/next/top/bottom page.

 3. Move from the page history ("Jump->History " or tool button).

 4. Mark some page and later move there.

 5. Click the page slider or drag and drop it.

 6. Use the spin control in the tool bar or enter the Page Number in the associated editing box (Jump->Input Page Number), or use the arrow keys.

 7. While pressing the wheel button of the Microsoft IntelliMouse, turn the wheel.

 8. In diplaying 4 or 16 pages together in a reduced size, the pages are changed by using PageUp or pageDown etc. and  the pointed page is displayed in a normal size by clicking right mouse button.

 9. Instruct a page move by a DDE communication from an external program.

 - To Another file

 - Other Methods
Move by a String Search or HyperTeX or source specials.

Note: The assignments to various function keys can be referenced in the "Key Function Table".


Another file
To open a dvi file, you can use the following methods:

1. Specify in "File->Open" or "File->History" (cf. folder history) in dviout, or select the corresponding tool button.

2. Specify in the command line at start-up.

3. Drag the dvi file or the tar file containing a dvi file and drop it on the dviout icon or on the running dviout.

4. Set "Associating dvi files with dviout" that has the .dvi extension.  By doing this, when the icon of the dvi file is double-clicked by the left button of the mouse, dviout starts.

5. Use DDE (cf. "Link to Other Programs").

6. Specify the functions to be automatically updated when the dvi file in the view is updated (cf. -renew:).

7. Jump using HyperTeX (You can open dvi files on the Internet)


Page Number
How to specify the page in the input box in the tool bar.

 <number>: Move to the <number>-th page.

+<number>: Relative move forward of <number>pages.

-<number>: Relative move backward of <number>pages.

.<number>: Move to the <number>th page when counting (towards the beginning) from the last page.  If <number> is not specified, move to the last page.

While pressing the SHIFT or CTRL key when exiting, hit the ENTER key : Specify the nombre page.

For .<number> above, nombre becomes the page when counting towards the beginning from the last page.

Note: By default, since a slash (/) is assigned to the page number input, a page jump can be made by the /20[Enter], /.[SHIFT]+[Enter], etc. key inputs.


Start and Exit

Dviout for Windows can be started in several ways:

1. Click the dviout icon.

2. Set "Associating dvi files with dviout" with the .dvi extension. If the dvi file icon is double clicked after setting, dviout starts and the clicked file is displayed(cf. no more dviout).

3. Start from the command line.

    dviout [parameters] [foo [option]]

parameters: Set by using spaces as the delimiters like -mag=2 -BMP=3.  The parameter -Set=!m means that dviout starts with a maximized Window.
The parameter -NULL is a special setting, which specifies not to read the Parameters from Registry.

If the parameter list starts with
    -NULL=(<x0>,<y0>)-(<x1>,<y1>))
then the dviout windows occupies the portion of the screen specified by the upper left and lower right corners in pixels.  For example, to Preview in the whole screen, hide the various bars in the View Menu setting, and let -NULL=(0,-40)-(1024,768), say.

If the parameter list starts with
    -1,
then the first dviout is executed or gets the command.  The result is similar when no more dviout is set in the first dviout.
For example, the parameter list starts with -2 indicates the command to the second dviout.

foo : This specifies the dvi file name.  The .dvi extension can be omitted.  If foo is a directory name, the dialog for selecting dvi files in that directory opens.

option : Indicates the page first displayed when it is a number.
If h is set and an earlier log displaying foo.dvi remains, the page is displayed when closing it before.
If #name is set, the label name of the jump destination of HyperTeX indicates the page including the name location.
If "# line_number soure_text_name" is set, the jump destination is indicated by the corresponding source specials.  Here a space is necessary after #.

Filename: If dviout.exe is renamed into dvioutj.exe/dvioute.exe, then it considers that the main langage of the operating system is assumed to be Japanese/English.

Note: Multiple dviouts can be started.  The maximum number can be changed by -multi:.  If the maximal number of dviouts are started and another dviout is requested to preview a new dvi file, the dviout started last displays that dvi file in the default case(cf. "no more dviout").

When exiting dviout, the following states are saved and are resumed at the next start.

- View or hide for the Tool Bar, Scroll Bar, Status Bar, and Page Slider, and the Tool Bar Buttons
- Loupe size, magnification, shape, and motion speed
- Mouse cursor shape

However, if exited by File -> Quit , the states are not saved.  If you are running more than one dviout, the state information of only the first dviout is stored.


no more dviout
When "Option -> No more dviout" is checked and

dviout foo

is executed from an external program or the command line, the checked dviout (by default, the newest dviout or the last dviout when the limit of dviouts specified by -multi: were started) displays foo.dvi instead of starting a new dviout(the dvi file in the view closes).

This setting is effective for the newest one.  If all of the dviouts are exited, the settings are canceled and return to the defaults.


Link to Other Program

Call dviout from another program
In the state where dviout has already been started, when dviout is called again with the dvi file as the parameter, whether to start dviout one more time can be controlled (cf. "no more dviout").

forward/backward jump between a TeX editor
This is supported by source specials.  The link is done through an executable command with parameters or as a DDE server/client.

Following service support in DDE

    Service name
         a string starting with dviout(ex. dviout or dvioutj) or WinDVI
    Topic name
         dviout or dvioutn or WinDVI or the full path name of the current dvi file

Then dviout can be connected as the DDE server.  (If more than one dviout are running, the first one will be the default server. If dvioutn is the Topic name, then nth dviout is called.)
After connecting, the following XTYP_EXECUTE transactions and XTYP_REQUEST transactions can be specified.

---------- XTYP_EXECUTE transaction ----------
[WinNormal]  The dviout window becomes active.

[WinIconic] The dviout window becomes an icon.

[FileOpen(filename)]  "filename" is opened.  For example, send a string such as [FileOpen(c:\document\foo.dvi)] or [FileOpen("c:\document\foo.dvi")].  If "filename" is not a full path, the operation cannot be guaranteed.
If "filename" is a directory name, the dialog for selecting the dvi file in that directory is opened.

[FileReopen]  indicates reopening and redisplaying the file currently open in dviout.

[PageMove(page)] moves to the specified page.  For example, [PageMove(10)][FileReopen] is used.

[PageOpen(page)] indicates the page displayed first in the file opened by the next [FileOpen(filename)].
As on the command line, when the history (cf. File Menu) is used, "page" may not be a number and becomes "h".  In this case, filename is not a full path but is searched for in the history.
On the other hand, "l" implies the last page.
For HyperTeX, the display position beginning with a pound sign (#) as in "#name" can be specified.  The souce specials are indicated by # line_number source_file or # line_number/string source_file.

[ValueSet(parameter=value)]  sets the Parameters.  For example, the string of the updated parameters as in [ValueSet(dpi=600 y=B5)]  and its value are transmitted.

[FileExit]  indicates an automatic exit when the current DDE connection to dviout ends.

[FilePrint]  indicates printing the file currently open in dviout.  The operation is identical to selecting printing from the menu, and the dialog opens.

[FilePrint(parameter:value ...)]  same as above and moreove, change the parameter vaules of the dialog and push [OK] button if necessary.
The necessary ones in the following parameter are indicated by separating by spaces such as

[FilePrint(From:5 To:10 OK:50)]
From:<n>     <n> is the start page number
To:<n>       <n> is the last page number to print
Copies:<n>   <n> is the number to be copied
Reduce:<n>   <n> is to reduce/magnify.  <n> is the number so that 1000 means the equal size
Odd:         only even pages
Even:        only odd pages
U2page:      unite two pages in a sheet
BlankTop:    first page is blank in the above
RoghtToLeft: printing right page is first
Ujob:<n>     Unite job(<n>==1 means ON and 0 means OFF)
Collate:     Collate Copies
Reverse:     Reverse order
dviprt:<n>   dviprt(<n>==1 means ON and 0 means OFF)
OK:<n>       waiting <n>*100 mm sec and push [OK] button.  1000 mm sec = 1 sec is the default.  From 0.1 sec to 2 min is possible.

[Function(key)]  The function defined by key (with more than 140 types) is executed.  The "key" parameter contains Key Symbol, which is the set of the two letters displayed enclosed by square brackets [ ] in the "Key Function Table" view of the "Help->Key table," or they are arranged next to each other.
  If written successively, they are executed successively.
For example, [Function(FN)] is the same as [FileReopen], and [Function(FPFX)] is the same as [FilePrint] and [FileExit].
More generally commands in the format of dviout specials are allowed.
---------- XTYP_REQUEST transaction ----------
The value of a Parameter is obtained by giving the parameter name such as TEXPK, y. The return value is the same string as is given after =  by Option->All Parameters.

Besides usual parameter name the following can be given.

version    Version number of dviout such as 3.03.2.
number     The label number of the current dviout.
dvifile    The full pathname of the dvi file being previewed. It is NULL string if there exists no such file.
DVIfile    Same as above but it is a short filename.
current_page The current page of the dvi file. The return value is as 10(6), which shows "physical page(logical page)".
total_page The last page number of the current dvi file. The return vale is in the same format as above.
time_stamp The timestamp of the current dvi file.

----------------------------------------------
dviout may have the upward compatibility with WinDvi and WinDviPRO.

Since these functions are all independently implemented, there is no need to be concerned about DDE in future function extensions.

Instead of sending multiple commands in order, they can be successively sent once with no spaces as in "[...][...]".  The maximum length of the command array is of 1,024 bytes.

Refer to "Example Using DDE".


Example Using DDE
For example, the following descriptions are made in Hidemaru's macro language.
    -------------------------------------------
    ddeinitiate "dviout", "dviout";
    ddeexecute "[FileExit]";
    ddeexecute "[FileOpen(c:\\document\\foo.dvi)]";
    ddeexecute "[FilePrint]";
    ddeterminate;
    -------------------------------------------
The c:\document\foo.dvi file is opened and the Print dialog appears. When printing ends, the DDE connection ends, and dviout exits.

    -------------------------------------------
    ddeinitiate "dviout", "dviout1";
    if(!result) {
      run "dviout ";
      ddeinitiate "dviout", "dviout";
    }else
      $basefile = dderequest("DVIfile");
    if(strlen($basefile) < 1)
      $basefile = leftstr(filename,strlen(filename3)-3)+"dvi";
    if(selecting)
      $SrcWord = "/" + gettext(seltopx,seltopy,selendx,selendy);
    else $SrcWord="";
    ddeexecute "[PageOpen(# "+str(lineno)+$SrcWord+" "+filename3+")]";
    ddeexecute "[WinNormal]";
    ddeexecute "[FileOpen("+$basefile+")]";
    ddeterminate;
    -------------------------------------------
This is for the jump to dviout by source specials.  If a string (word) is selected, the jump is more accurate.

This jump is valid when the followings are written in the base files foo.tex

    ......
    \input sub/foo1.tex
    ......

and foo1.tex is edited by Hidemaru.
When foo.tex is edited, the jump is valid even if dviout is not executed.


Printing

By selecting "File->Print", the dialog box for the print options opens. Press "OK", then the currently displayed dvi file will be printed.  An extended dialog is given by the button [+].

 - Page Selection
 - Page Option
 - Number of Copies Specification
 - Printing Two Pages per Sheet
 - Page Printing Order
 - Reduce/Magnify Printing Function
 - dviprt Printing Function
 - Output to File
 - Pause at Each Page Function
 - Unite Print Jobs

 - Cancel During Print Data Output
 - Differences in the Printing Methods(Q_P7)

Note: If you use a color printer supported by Windows (not using the printing functions based on dviprt but using a Windows printer driver), you can print a dvi file with colors which has color images, for example, embedded with PostScript specials.

Note: When the current specification of parameters for preview does not match the printer, printed result would not be proper.  (You can specify the parameters of the printer by the [Setup...] button in the dialog box.)  Check the resolution (dpi), paper size, and its orientation.

By specifying the parameters in the modes in "Property Sheets->[REGISTRY]", you can use the parameters only for printing which are different from these for preview.

Note: If the specifications of paper size or orientation in the printer driver do not match those of dviout  (errors of 5% or less are ignored),  nor if the resolution of the printer does not match that of dviout, dviout will display the Warning dialog box (except for dviprt Printing).

In the former case, you have two possibilities as following -- to ignore the warning or re-specify the parameters again:

 OK:      Ignore the difference in the paper size and execute
 NO:      Set again

In the latter case, you have three possibilities as following -- employing the printer's resolution and execute printing, or print out with the dviout's resolution, or re-specify the parameters again:

 OK:      Change and print
 NO:      Output at the dviout resolution
 Ignore:  Set again or stop


Page Selection
Page Selection <- Print Dialog
By pressing this button, you can

      Marked page section,
      Only the last page in the marked page section,
      Only the first page in the marked range or
      Only the page currently displayed

is selected as the printing page section.  Each time the button is pressed, the four items above are selected successively.  (However, if no page section is marked, only the current page is selected.)  You can also specify the numbers in the dialogue box.

If the page section is not specified, the pages from the marked one to the current one is regarded as the page section to print.  If there are no marked pages, only the current page is regarded as the page section to print.


Page Option
By [Option] button in the print dialog, one can input the pages to be printed or use a macro to indicate the ordering of pages to be printed.  This option is ignored if dviout calls an outer DVIware for printing.

Selecting [Input by User], one can input the pages to be printed.  For example,

2 5 8 -23 56- 40-50

means that the pages 2, 5, 8, from the top page to the page 23, the pages from 56 to the last and the pages from 40 to 50 will be printed in this order.  If P is incerted before numbers such as

P 30-60 . 90-

then the numbering of pages follows the page nombles.

P    all the numbers after P are considered to be page nombles.
.    a blank page
Z+   pause afrer every printing
Z-   cansel the above
Z    toggle swith of the above
Q    ignore all after this Q
M... a macro block (cf. Page Macro)
@file_name  read the file file_name

Selecting another one than [Input by User], the ordering of pages to be printed is determined by the selected macro under the indicated range.  For example, if 4to1 is selected and Printing Two Pages per Sheet is chosen, then under the two sided printing by the printer the pages are as follows

[4,1]/[2,3] [8,5]/[6,7] ...

If the sheets are folded by the center, the pages are in the natural order.  Here the number 1 means the first page of the selected range.

The Page Macro to define the ordering of the pages for printing is written in a file par\*.pgm and it may be written by the user.

[OK]       : print by the selected way
[Check]    : show the pages to be printed
[Hide]     : hide the selected macro from the list
[Appear]   : recover the selected macro from the list
[Kill]     : erace the selected macro
[->Hidden] : show the list of hiden macros
[->Current]: return to the list
[Edit]     : edit the selected macro
[Cancel]   : quit


Page Macro

When [Option] is selected in the print dialog, the macros to control the pages to for Printing are defined by the files par\*.pgm under the directory of dviout.  Each file corresponds to each macro.  Its contents are as follows.

The line starting with # is a comment line.  In the comment lines following from the top line, the first line which is not started by #j# (resp. #e#) is shown in the list box under Non-Japanese (resp. Japanese) Windows system.

The blocks are separated by blanks or lines and the block started by "M" is a macro block, which is of the form

  Minitialize;difference;pages

and the pages in the selected range are output according to this macro.  The macro block M of the length 1 without any parameter means to clear the defined macro.

- The 4 integer variables v, w, x, y, z may be used.

- pages are a sequence of "equation"s or "Z+", "Z-", "Z", "." separated by "," and the page whose number equals the value of the "equation" is output if z > 0.

- After the above output, the values of valiables are changed according to difference and then the value of z is subtracted by 1.  If z > 0 still holds, then pages are output again according to pages.  This procedure  will be repeated.

- "equation" may be a variable or a number or their connection by "+" or "-" such as x+5, x+v-3.

- If the value of the "equation" in pages is not in the indicated range, the blank page is output in default.

- If some of "equation"s in pages are put in [  ] and all the pages indicated by the "equation" are out of the indicated range, then the corresponding output of blank pages are ignored.  The nesting of [  ] is not allowed.

- initialize and difference are the sequence of "substitution"s. "substition" is one of the forms "variable+=equation", "variable-=equation", "variable*=equation", "variable/=equation", "variable&=equation".

- In the beginning the variables are initialized as v = w = 0 and x by the first page of the range, y by the last page of the range and z by the number of the total pages of the region and then the substitution by initialize is performed.

It is something like in the C language

   v = w = 0; x = start_page; y = end_page; z = y - x + 1;
   for(initialize; z > 0; difference, z--)
      { Output(pages);}

For example

 Mv+=y,v&=1,y-=v,z-=v;y-=2,z-=1;y

means to output even pages in the reverced order.  Printing four pages in one sheet with two pages in one side of sheet is done by

 Mz+=3,z/=4;x+=4;x+3,Z+,x,Z,[x+1,Z+,x+2,Z]

with pauses after each print.  If a printer which prints both sides of a sheet is used, then

 Mz+=4,z/=4,x-=1;x+=4;x+3,x,[x+1,x+2]

means a similar printing with the blank first page.


Number of Copies Specification
Number of Copies Specification <- Print Dialog
If box of Copies: is active in the print dialogue sheet, you can specify how many copies to print.

If the dvi file has only one page or when the check box for dviprt is switched from ON to OFF, Copies: is sometimes disabled.  In this case, press [Setup...] and press "OK" in the dialog for setting the printer.

If the print driver does not support printing multiple copies, you cannot specify Copies:.


Printing Two Pages per Sheet
When the radio button of "Unite 2 pages as" is pressed, you can print two logical pages onto each physical sheet of paper.

You can adjust the width of each logical page on the paper by pressing the buttons beside the radio button.  The displayed figure shows the horizontal width of the reduced or enlarged page.  If this value becomes 0, the two pages are printed on the same position.  (cf. Examples Using the Print Options )

In printing two pages per sheet, you should make sure that the paper size or vertical and horizontal orientations are correctly specified in [Setup ...], and these parameter match the paper in your printer. Otherwise, the printed result would not be proper.

If you employ dviprt to print, dviprt can guess the paper size and orientation, and guessed parameter values are used as default in some case.


Examples Using the Print Options
you want reduce the paper size from A4 to A5, i.e., Printing Two Pages per Sheet on A4 paper.
In "File -> Print", check "A4 -> A5" and "unite 2 pages".
Then specify The horizontal orientation of A4 in the printer setting in [Setup...].

the case of Printing Two Pages per Sheet from logical page 1 to page 7 ,
  Reverse  Blank Top  right to left.
                        (1,2)->(3,4)->(5,6)->(7, )
   X                    (7, )->(5,6)->(3,4)->(1,2)
           X            ( ,1)->(2,3)->(4,5)->(6,7)
                   X    (2,1)->(4,3)->(6,5)->( ,7)
   X       X            (6,7)->(4,5)->(2,3)->( ,1)
   X               X    ( ,7)->(6,5)->(4,3)->(2,1)
           X       X    (1, )->(3,2)->(5,4)->(7,6)


Page Printing Order
You can specify the printing order, such as select only even or odd pages, in reverse order, and two pages per sheet. In the Printing Two Pages per Sheet, you can also specify the logical page order on each sheet, like from the right page to the left page, or print a blank page first.


Reduce/Magnify Printing Function
When you select the radio button besides "Same size" in "Reduce/Magnify size of a page",  quality of fonts such as PK fonts would be poor except for variable-sized fonts (such as TrueType fonts).

By checking "Adjust origin", you can adjust the origin of the dvi file on the sheet according to the reduction or magnification.


dviprt Printing

If you check the box of dviprt in the print dialogue, you can employ the print driver of dviout itself, dviprt, or dvips etc. in the console version (without using any driver of Windows95/NT).

When you employ the print driver of dviout, you can use various printers such as ESC/P, PC-PR, NM system. You can use also LIPS III/IV, ESC/Page (by employing LBP Driver), and others by using CFG File (can be selected by the [CFG file] button). In particular, you can expect fast printing for LIPS III/IV and ESC/Page, because of adequate optimization.
However, color printing is not supported.

If you want to employ dviprt of console version, you should check that you can print, for example, foo.dvi in command line, like,

dviprt foo.dvi

You can refer to the manual of dviprt to specify the environment variables and parameters in the parameter file (default file name of dviprt.par).

If you can print dvi files by dviprt in command line, you can also print by dviprt from dviout when the box of dviprt is checked in the printing dialogue.

If you press [Setup...] before "OK", you can temporarily change the parameters of dviprt.

You can specify other various process, such as using a program other than dviprt. (cf. Examples of dviprt Settings,  Property sheets -> [Printer] -> -dviprt:.)

Note: In dviprt, the Printing Two Pages per Sheet is not supported except for LIPS III/IV or ESC/Page.


Examples of dviprt Settings

The default (when the -dviprt: parameter is blank or only + on the Property Sheets->[Printer]) is

dvipdfm^X{x}.exe ^w -s ^a-^b "^q"^Y{;"^d.pdf"}^z^{dvipdfm&x}^{View PDF &?}Make PDF by dvipdfm(x)

(This is displayed in [Setup] in the dialog before printing.)

echo^-O=^t^>>^^f;dviprt^-=^f^^q^^p;copy^^t^sprn^/b;del^^t

When this is set and the TMP environment variable is specified as c:\tmp and you want print foo.dvi from page 1 to 5, then the batch file of

echo -O=c:\tmp\dvitmp.$$$ >> c:\tmp\dvitmp.par
dviprt -=c:\tmp\dvitmp.par foo.dvi 1-5
copy c:\tmp\dvitmp.$$$ prn /b
del c:\tmp\dvitmp.$$$

is created and executed.
In c:\tmp\dvitmp.par, for example, the parameter -y=A4P is written.

If you have dviprt.exe of Windows console version in c:\dviout, you can specify as following:

+c:\dviout\^P

In this case, this is directly executed without passing through the batch file.

When using a LIPS III compatible driver of dviout, the parameter -dviprt: is

+`l

and when using a LIPS IV compatible driver, the parameter -dviprt: is

+`lD600

When using a 600 dpi ESC/Page compatible driver for LP-9000, the parameter -dviprt: is

+`mD600

For LBP Drivers, you can add the specification of subparameters.


CFG File
If you want to use the print driver of dviout and printer other than ESC/P, PC-PR, NM system, LIPS III, LIPS IV, or ESC/Page, you have to employ a printer definition file adapted to each printer.
Also you have to convert the source file defining the required information (usually, the files have  the .src extension) into a binary file (usually, the files have the .cfg extension) readable by dviout for Windows by optcfg.exe .

Read the documentation on how to write the source files.  You can refer the many included examples.  You can specify the output format in the PBM, G3FAX, or EPSF format by using the attached printer definition files.


LBP Driver

This driver is used for the laser beam printer (LBP) such as the Canon LIPS III/IV specified by `l  or `L  in the -dviprt: parameter, and Epson's ESC/Page specified by `m  or `M .

When using this driver, you can download the font to your printer or you use the Japanese scalable font in your printer.
If the -dviprt: is specified in uppercase letters such as `L and `M, the printing resolution can be changed automatically to that of printer when the specified resolution conflicts with the printer resolution.

The default scalable fonts are the Mincho type and the Kaku Gothic type.  However, in some case, the Kaku Gothic type is not available for LIPS III.  In this case, the Mincho type is used for all Japanese fonts.

Note: The priority of Japanese fonts other than JXL4 is the Japanese fonts installed in the LBP, Windows TrueType Japanese fonts, and other Japanese fonts.
When you use Windows TrueType Japanese font(s), the subparameters of v and f described below must be specified.  It would be better to specify k.

When a character modification such as an outline font is specified in LIPS III/IV, there are Restrictions on installed LBP Japanese fonts due to the printer specifications.

If a LIPS III/IV or ESC/Page driver is specified by -dviprt:, the following subparameters can be specified with separators of semicolons ;  or colons : .

Subparameter v: Adjusting the vertical-to-horizontal ratio of the Japanese font or disabling the printer's Japanese font.
Subparameter d: Enabling fonts downloading and specifying the available capacity
Subparameter r: Specifying the method for calculating the available capacity for fonts downloading
Subparameter k: Enabling downloading of Japanese fonts
Subparameter m: Adjusting the download range
Subparameter f: Specifying the Japanese scalable fonts in printer for each TeX fonts
Subparameter D: Specifying Printer resolution
Subparameter o: Specifying the parameter file to refer
Subparameter j: Adjusting the baseline of the Japanese font
Subparameter s: Specifying magnification and reduction of Japanese fonts
Subparameter u: Specifying the data transfer block
Subparameter c: Enabling data compression in LIPS III/IV
Subparameter E: Enabling correction of characters near the unprintable area in the paper

For LIPS III, the default values of parameters are

-dpi:300
-dviprt:`lv1000;m2;d512;j79;s1047;D300

For LIPS IV,  when -dviprt:+`lD600 specification.

-dpi:600
-dviprt:`lv1000;m2;d512;j79;s1047;D600

are used as default values.

For ESC/Page compatible LBP (LP-9000/7000/3000/2000, etc.), default values are

-dpi:300
-dviprt:+`Mv1000;m2;d512;j90;s1000;D300

If -dviprt:+`MD600 is specified, the above D300 will replaced by D600 and match the values for LP-9000 (600 dpi).

However, only when -dviprt:+`MD240 is specified, the j90 also changes. Then

-dpi:240
-dviprt:+`mv1000;m2;d512;j200;s1000;D240

is the default and these match the values for LP-7000 (240 dpi).


Subparameter v
You can adjust the vertical-to-horizontal ratio of a Japanese scalable font by specifying the number following subparameter v.  The vertical size is enlarged or reduced to 1/1000 of the given number.

The default value is 1000. A value from 200 to 5000 is accepted.  A value out of this range except for zero is interpreted as 1000.
If you give zero to this v subparameter, this disables the use of scalable fonts in LBP .


Subparameter d
You can specify the capacity of the available memory for downloading a font in k byte units by giving a number following subparameter d.  The default is 512.  If you give zero, this disabling the font downloading.

If Subparameter k is not specified, font downloading is done only for single-byte characters.  (In this case, the NTT JTeX Japanese font, which has  a single-byte system, will be downloaded to your printer. If you specify the -ntt: option, this will result in conversion of the font coding system to that of a two-byte one. Then the fonts will not be downloaded
 to your printer.)

The font downloading is carried out within the (specified) available memory capacity. Only for the characters whose frequency is larger than the value  specified by Subparameter m in specified printing page section, fonts will be downloaded to your printer. The downloading starts with the most frequently used font. In general, the fonts used more frequently will be downloaded in
 earlier stages.

But when the total number of downloaded European language font sets reaches "32 minus the total number of used scalable Japanese fonts", the font downloading will stop there.  (A font set having character codes larger than 128 is counted as 2 font sets.)


Subparameter r
In default, the memory capacity of font downloading in Subparameter d is calculated from the cell size of each font (maximum vertical and horizontal dot size of the character in the downloading font).

When r is specified, the memory capacity is calculated form the actual amount of transferred data (the size of each character).  The resulting memory value would be smaller than that of the default above.


Subparameter D
You can specify the printer resolution in dpi units by giving the subparameter D.  On the other hand, you can specify the resolution of the fonts by parameter -dpi:.  For example, when -dpi:240 and -dviprt:+`lD300, the printed result would be reduced to 80%.


Subparameter o
You can specify a parameter file by giving the subparameter o.
This subparameter should be put at the end of the subparameters of -dviprt:`l.
You can specify a file created by optcfg.exe.

dviprt will refer a parameter file after usual initialization of the printer.  After reading the parameter file, dviprt sends commands specified in the parameter file.  Therefore, even if you specify other parameters of dviout, for example,  -y: for paper selection, these specification might be ignored and the values in the parameter file will be used.


Subparameter j
By specifying subparameter j, you can adjust the baseline only for LBP.  You can also use option -J: for the baseline adjustment, but it affects all the other Japanese fonts (not only for LBP font).

If LBP prints kanji fonts of LBP num% of the font height lower than the baseline without any subparameter j, specifying jnum*10 in the subparameter will result in the fonts aligned with the base line.

The default value in LIPS III/IV is 79.


Subparameter k
By specifying this subparameter, you can download Japanese fonts (besides printer's Japanese fonts) mixing with single-byte European fonts. (cf. Subparameter v, Subparameter f)

For example, this would be useful when you want to use a Windows TrueType Japanese Gothic font.

When you are using only the printer's Japanese fonts, this subparameter is ignored.

You can control the downloading of the Japanese font by giving the two numbers after k.

k[=max_char[;skip]]

This specification prohibits the mixing the Japanese font with a European font which has already downloaded more characters than max_char (default, 63) and its appearance is less than skip(default, 4)th most frequent.
If the numbers for the latter, or the former and the latter are omitted, these default values are used.

For example, if zero is specified for max_char and a fairly large number is specified for skip, after the European font is downloaded, only the Japanese font is downloaded without accompanying any of the European font.


Subparameter m
The only fonts will be downloaded whose appearance in the specified page section for printing is more frequent than the number specified in subparameter m.

The default for this number is 2.

However, if the total appearances of the characters in a single font set is less than four, or characters have a vertical or horizontal dot size exceeding 128,  fonts for these characters are not download to your printer.


Subparameter f

By giving subparameter f, you can specify a scalable font for each Japanese TeX font.  You can give more than one font specification, and in this case the specification is read in written order.  For fonts which you don't specify the scalable fonts, the default scalable fonts will be used.  The specification format is given below.

fname=shotai[G][H][F][S][O][;vh_ratio[;weight[;dots;dots;...]]]

name
This is the font name in TeX (assigned to ^s), for example min, goth. You must remove the font size (usually in pt) from the font name.

shotai
This the typeface number in LIPS III/IV, such as Mincho Type 80, Kaku Gothic Type 81, Maru Gothic Type 82, Textbook Type 83, or Block Style Type 84.

For ESC/Page, this is Kaku Gothic Type Kanji 9, Mincho Type Kanji 10, Maru Gothic Type Kanji 66, Textbook Type Kanji 67, Block Style Type Kanji 68, or Semicursive Type Kanji 69.

There are additional options:
G  Specification for the pseudo Gothic (For LIPS III/IV, one dot increase in the width.  For ESC/Page, the line width is one.)
H Specification for the pseudo Gothic (For LIPS III/IV, two dots increase in the width.  For ESC/Page, the line width is three.)
F  Specification for the fill pattern for LIPS III/IV. For ESC/Page,  specifying 20% screen pattern in
O  in the outline font
S  Specification for shadow printing

G and H cannot be simultaneously specified. Other options can be specified at the same time.

vh_ratio
specify "the vertical-to-horizontal ratio of a font" x 1000.

If you give zero for this option, a scalable font is not used for the specified font.  In addition, if you specify dots option, the value for corresponding font will be default values. In this case, if there is a following f option, the value of f description is used.  If nothing follows, the default values are used.
If you give "1" for vh_ratio, a scalable font is not used for items specified in dots.

weight
Default 22 (Mincho 22, Kaku Gothic 22, Maru Gothic 2)

dots
The fonts of the dot size specified in this option is skipped and not applied in current subparameter f description. For the fonts skipped here, the next specification of f is referred.
You can specify a range such as dots-dots.

In the specification of  f, options after shotai can be omitted.  (The default is used.)  For example,

fgoth=82;1000;2;fmin=80;1000;22;16-24;32
fgoth=80H;1000;22;44;fgoth=80OS;2000


Subparameter s
Subparameter s is the parameter for adjusting the character magnification and reduction only for LBP.

In some time, for example, even if the LIPS III Japanese font requires a width of 10 pt in the design, the actual printed width of the characters is about 95.5% of that width.

The specified number is actual magnification x 1000.  For example, if you give 1000, this results in no magnification nor reduction. In case you give 2000, the size will doubled.  Even if the font size is changed, the print position is corrected properly so that the positions of center lines of the characters do not change.  The default is 1047.

If you specify -S: option, the specification by subparameter s is also modified by -S: option.  For example, if -S:500 and -dviprt:+`ls2000, the installed LBP font is not magnified or reduced.


Subparameter u
In the Canon LBP, when many fonts are used such as EPSF, TPIC, and Windows TrueType Japanese fonts, sometimes unintentional white lines are inserted in the horizontal direction in the printed result, or even the LBP downs requiring the service man call.
When this subparameter is specified, you can avoid such problems in some case.

Integers are specified its arguments. You can also specify this by giving minimal unit and pins in the printer's CFG File.

The defaults are minimal unit=1 and pins=8.  But if n is specified in the argument, the absolute value of n changes to the minimal unit.  If n is negative, pins changes to 24.

If you have a problem in printing, u10 or u-10 might be helpful.  Also see Subparameter c.


Subparameter c
This flag is for data compression in the raster image data transfer in LIPS III/IV.

In usual case, it has almost no effects.  However, when subparameter u is specified, it would be useful. For example,
-dviprt:`lc;u-10.

For ESC/Page printers, this specification is ignored.


Subparameter E
LIPS III cannot use the scalable fonts nor downloaded fonts for the characters at near the unprintable area on the sheet. (Printing is possible in ESC/Page, but the processing by the dviout is not proper.  Therefore, when characters divided at the unprintable region, use this option.)

For example, when poster.tex is used, one logical page must be divided into multiple physical sheets and above problem might occur.

If subparameter E is specified, for characters that cross a unprintable boundary, Japanese scalable fonts in LBP are employed in the vector mode and the other fonts are sent as bit map images.
In the vector mode, there are some restrictions for character modifications and the print codes become redundant. Thus it is better not to use this mode for usual case.


Restrictions on installed LBP Japanese fonts
In the following cases, specifications such as the fill pattern (F), shadow (S), and weight are ignored in a type specification of Subparameter f.

 - When the font size exceeds 420 x 420 dots (about 3.5 cm for LIPS III)
 - When there are rotations other than in 90 degrees units by rt in extended tpic specials
 - When characters around the unprintable area are printed using subparameter E


Including printer control codes into TeX file
If you employ the a built-in printer driver in printing (box of dviprt is checked in the printing dialog), you can include files containing the printer control codes into TeX files.

The followings are examples of TeX special commands. They would be useful when including draw images written in the LBP page description language.

\special{lipsfile=name}   (for LIPS III/IV)
\special{escpagefile=name}     (for ESC/Page)
\special{pdlfile=name}         (for dviout internal driver)

These commands send the name files ( name.lp3, name.epg, and name.pdl, respectively) directly to the printer.  If the file name is not available, the command is ignored.  When Previewing, these command are also ignored.

For LIPS III/IV and ESC/Page, these files are printed on the page where these special commands are put in the TeX source.

For details, see the attached documents.


Output to File
Output to File <- Print Dialog
If "Print to File" is checked, the output data is not sent to the printer, but output to a file.

When dviprt or the other external driver is employed, you cannot use this option.


Pause at Each Page
If this option is checked, dviout takes a pause at each page printing and waits for your next instruction.

When you are employing the dviout internal driver (the box dviprt is checked), this option can not be used.


Unite Print Jobs
Unite Print Jobs <- Print Dialog

By checking [Unite job] box in the print dialog, you can unit printing job of dviout when printing more than one page. When the print job is not united, canceling the printing is simpler.  This option valid only when dviprt is not employed.

Be careful when sending your fax by dviout. When you don't unit the jobs, each page is sent separately and you have to dial up for each page.

When using a Windows driver for a PostScript printer, data conversion may take a long time.  In such a case, printing each page would be faster than united one because printing starts immediately.

The default is automatically determined by comparing the hard disk space and the printing data amount.

When the printing page section is changed, the defaults are also changed (automatically).  Therefore, if you want change besides the default, check/uncheck the box after changing the printing page section.

The united job is selected automatically when the disk has the space more than twice of the printing data amount (the printing data is estimated as a binary bitmap data).  When using a PostScript printer, estimated data amount may differ from actual data amount.


Cancel During Print Data Output
While sending the data to the printer, dviout shows a dialog box for canceling the Printing.

Note when the box of dviprt is checked, this is not displayed.


User Interface

1. The dviout Window has the following function bars around the main window (Preview window).  These bars can be hidden except for the title bar and the menu bar (see View Menu on the menu bar).

  1.1. Title bar: The top part of the window, displaying the name of the dvi file either in full-path format (for focused window) or in short format (for out-of-focus window).

  1.2. Menu bar: Below the title bar, with the File, Jump, Display, View, Presentation, Option, and Help menus and submenus.

  1.3. Toolbar: Below the menu bar, with various toolbuttons, a window for String Search lists, and a window for the Page Number.  Each of the right six toolbuttons can be exchanged with one of the other set of buttons (2nd tool buttons, cf. View Menu).
These 2nd tool buttons can be redefined by users(Q_V10, Q_O4).

  1.4. Status bar: The bottom part of the window, with information such as page number, resolution (dpi), gamma correction, page size.

  1.5. Scrollbar: By using this bar you can scroll the displayed sheet vertically/horizontally.  They appear at the right/bottom of the window when the scrolling is necessary.

  1.6. Page slider: It locates at the right end of the window.  Used to Move to another page.  The right part of the page slider indicates the selected page section (cf. Jump Menu).

2. The mouse can be used for the above operations (Q_V12).  IntelliMouse is also supported.

3. Keyboard can be used for operation.  You can re-define functions for keys (Property Sheets->[Key], Q_O10).


Menu Bar

File Menu
  History, Open, reNew, Print, Dviprt, eXit+Save, Quit
  Save as image: File, BMP in clipboard, EMF in clipboard
  Font/Image Embedding,  Open Log File
Jump Menu
  Next page, NExt page Top, Previous page, PreVious page Buttom, Top page, Bottom page, Down to next page, Up to previous page, More, Input page number, Last file
  History, Former history, Latter history, Quit history,
  Enable Hyper Jump, DireCt Jump to Editor, Graphic Editor
  Mark Page, -> Goto mark, <-> Exchange mark,  Mark Range,
  More: -50, -20, -10, -5, -2, +2, +5, +10, +20, +50 (page)
Search Menu
  Find, Upward, Downward
Display Menu
  Size: Magnify, Reduce, Fit, Full
  Preset: View1, View2, View3, View4
  Contrast: Blacker, Whiter, Reverse
  Loupe: magnify, reduce, bigger, smaller, measure, kill cursor
  Region: On, Cut, Recover
  Mouse shape
  two pages, rev-two pages, Y-two pages, cross pages, 16 pages
  Graphics, Color special, Color replace, Kill stop level
View Menu
  Tool Bar, Status Bar, Page Slider, Scroll Bar
  Change Tool Buttons, Flat Scroll Bar, Show Move Button, Reverse Move Button, Show Warning, Show Child Window, Animation cursor
  Grid: On/Off, Scale
  Information Window: Large, Medium, Small
  Background: default, white, black
  Small Editor
Presentation Menu
  Presentation switch, Presentation Menu
  Presentation type: general screen, white screen, black screen, white background, black background
  Cover sheet: Off, On, On for Pause, Scroll to Pause
  Cover type: bottom, right, left, bottom + right, bottom + left
  Use Mouse Button: Left, Right
  Draw: line, box, erace, thick, red, black, blue, green
  Cut edge
  Seamless Hyperjump
  Save Presentation settings
Paper Menu
  A*:  A3, A4, A5, A6, A7
  B*E: B3E, B4E, B5E, B6E
  B*J: B3J, B4J, B5J, B6J,
  KIKU, 46, NewBook, AB, Letter, Legal, Executive, Post Card,
  SVGA, XGA, SXGA, UVGA, User defined
  Landscape
Option Menu
  Setup Parameters, Choose Parameters, Read Parameters, All Parameters, Non-default Parameters
  Mode, No more dviout, Change Japanese fonts
  Macro: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
  dviout specials, source specials, Embedded Fonts, Check color specials, Continuous Renew, Clipboard + Editor
  Install, Uninstall
Help Menu
  Help Topics, How to Use Help, Use Help in English, Troubles in dviout, Tips on dviout, Help TeX
  Sytem Info
  Other Info.: Screen/File Info, Font Info, Buffer Info, Key table, Parameters
               URL of HyperTeX, Anchors of HyperTeX, Source specials, Embedded Fonts, initial.par
               Character size of TrueType
  About dviout


File Menu
File Menu <-Menu Bar

History: Select from previously read dvi files or folders (folder history).
Open: Select the dvi file from the Windows file menu.
reNew: Read the current dvi file again.
Print: Printing
Dviprt: Dviprt (Print Dialog)
eXit+Save: Information, such as the dviout window size and position, loupe state, and shape of the mouse cursor, is saved and dviout ends.  This information becomes the default in the next start-up.
Quit: dviout exits without saving the above information.

Save as image: The whole page or the indicated region in the view is saved as a EMF/BMC/BMP file format(cf. Q_O7). Using ABC output plug-in for 256 colors or less, the corresponding format such as PNG is also allowed. In the case of EMF or BMP format, it can be copied in Clipboard.
Automatic Save: The all pages in the view are automatically saved as EMF or BMP or BMC files.
Font/Image Embedding: Make a DVI file with embeded fonts and Images.
Open Log File: The log file is opened or closed.  (When in the open state, the toggle switch is checked.)
The error information, setting states of the Parameters in the "Option Menu", and various information in the "Help Menu" can be registered.


Automatic Save
Automatic Save <- File
All the pages in View are automatically saved as EMF or BMP or BMC files.

In the template of the filename, ^f means the DVI file name without extension, ^d means the page number and the figure between 1 to 9 preceeding to d is the number of the digits.  For example,

^f.^3d


Jump Menu
Jump Menu <-Menu Bar

Next page: Move to the next page.
NExt page Top: Move to the top of the next page.
Previous page: Move to the previous page.
PreVious page Bottom: Move to the bottom of the previous page.
Top page: Move the top page.
Bottom page: Move to the last page.
Down to next page: Move to the bottom of the sheet or the top of the next page
Up to previous page: Move to the top of the sheet or the bottom of the previous page
Input page number: You can input desired Page Number and move to the page.
Last file: Move to the last file.

History: Select from the history of the pages Previewed previously and move.

Former history: Go back one history of previewed pages or the last file.
Latter history: Move to the newest history in the history of previewed pages.
Quit history: Exit from the history jump above.

Enable Hyper Jump: HyperTeX specials are enabled or disabled.  When hyper jump is enabled, the item is checked.
DireCt Jump to Editor: When this is checked and a character is pointed by SHIFT+the left button of the mouse, dviout directly tries to jump to the editor by the source specials if possible.
Graphic Editor: Enables to call a graphic editor for an included graphic file (-gsrc:)

Mark Page: Mark the current page.  If another page has already been marked, the mark moves to the current page.
-> Goto mark: Move to the marked page.
<-> Exchange mark: Mark the current page and move to the previously marked page.
Mark Range: Specifies the page section from the marked page to the current page (the page section is displayed in the page slider).

More(Relative Page Move): -50, -20, -10, -5, -2, +2, +5, +10, +20, +50

You can assign frequently used functions to keys ([Key]).


Search Menu
Search Menu <-Menu Bar

Find: Opens the dialog box for a String Search.
Upward: Searches for the string from the end of the displayed page (but when the previous search was in the displayed page, from that position) towards the top of the document.
Downward: Searches for the string from the top of the displayed page (but when the previous search was in the displayed page, from that position) towards the end of the document.


Display Menu
Display Menu <-Menu Bar

Size
    Magnify: magnifies the Preview by one step.
    Reduce: reduces the preview by one step.
    Fit: displays fit in the display window size.
    Full: displays in the largest size that can be previewed by only scrolling either vertically or horizontally.

Preset
    View 1, View 2, View 3, View 4: selects the (4) view types set by [Display] of Property Sheet.

Contrast
    Blacker: increases the contrast of the letters (adjusts the gray scale)
    Whiter: decreases the contrast of the letters.
    Reverse: reverses black and white.

Loupe
   magnify: Increase the loupe magnification.
   reduce: Decrease the loupe magnification.
   bigger: Increase the loupe size.
   smaller: Decrease the loupe size.
   measure: Write measure in the square loupe.
   kill cursor: Erace mouse cursor in the loupe.

Region
   On: Indicate a rectangular region by the click of the left and right button of the mouse while the SHIFT key is pressed.  A toggle switch.
   Cut: Cut the region as a sheet.
   Recover: Recover the original sheet.

Mouse shape: switches the cursor shape of the mouse (when hand shaped, you can scroll the display without using the scroll bar.)

 two pages: Two pages are displayed together(toggle switch).
 rev-two pages: Two pages are displayed from right to left.
 Y-two pages: Two pages (all pages in Presentation Mode) are displayed vertically.
 cross pages: Four pages are displayed together in a reduced size. Scroll pages by Page Up/Down, Space/BS key. Jump to the pointed page by the right button of the mouse.
 16 pages: 16 pages are displayed together in a reduced size.  Scroll pages by Page Up/Down, Space/BS Key. Jump to the pointed page by the right button of the mouse.

Graphics: enables/disables reading Graphic Files(If this is checked, the specification of -GS: is referred).
Color special: turns ON/OFF the color of letters specified by specials
Color replace: switches AND-operation/REPLACE for the color topcoat.  White is always REPLACEed.
Kill stop level: ignores <levels> in dviout specials `+<levels>.


View Menu
View Menu <-Menu Bar

Tool Bar: display or hide the Tool Bar
Status Bar: display or hide the Status Bar
Page Slider: display or hide the Page Slider
Scroll Bar: display or hide the Scroll Bar

Change Tool Buttons: Switch the definitions of the buttons on the right part of the tool bar to another.  (You can define the function of the User button at the right end.  (cf. Q_O4)
Flat Scroll Bar: Use flat scroll bar(The change will be valid in the next session)
Show Move Button: Show or hide buttons to move the former/latter/top/last page(The change will be valid in the next session)
Reverse Move Button: Reverse the direction to move by these buttons
Show Warning: display or hide the Warning messages
Show Child Window: display or hide the Window to execute a child process (On/Off of -Wshow)
Animation cursor: animation cursor(On/Off for jumps by source specials/HyperTeX)
Grid: Show grid in preview(On/Off/Scale)
Information Window: Large/Medium/Small Size of the window appeared on the buttom on the preview window in case of Warning or Information
Background: Select the background color of the preview Window(The change will be valid in the next session)

Small Editor: Opens a small edit window.  You can copy the character(s) or string(s) to/from the Windows clipboard.


Presentation Menu

Presentation switch: Switch to the Presentation Mode
Presentation Menu: Validity of Menu dialog when Presentation Mode starts
Cover sheet: Off, On, On for Pause Switch to use cover sheet in Presentation Mode.  In case of On for Pause no part of a page is hidden where no pause special exists.
        Scroll to Pause Scroll to the position where a pause special locates.

Presentation type: general screen, white screen, black screen, white background, black background, color screen is default.
Cover type: bottom, right, left, bottom + right, bottom + left
use Mouse button; Left, Right
Draw: line, box, erace, red, black, blue, green Draw lines by Shift+Mouse button

Cut edge: Cut the spaces along the edge (cf.-edge:).
Seamless Hyperjump: Seamless Hyperjump (For seculity, check this only if the resources to be jumped are not dangerous)
Save Presentation settings: Save the current setting for Presentation Mode(cover sheet, Presentation type and cover type, Presentation Menu) and the switches of HyperTeX, dviout specials, source specials and Embedded Fonts.


Paper Menu
Paper Menu <-Menu Bar

A* : A3, A4, A5, A6, A7
B*E: B3E, B4E, B5E, B6E
B*J: B3J, B4J, B5J, B6J
Legal, Letter, Executive, Post Card
Special Size: 46, KIKU, NewBook, AB, Gov.-Legal, Half-Letter, Gov-Letter,
              SVGA, XGA, SXGA, UVGA
User Defined

Landscape: Portrait <-> Landscape


Option Menu
Option Menu <-Menu Bar

Setup Parameters: opens property sheets of Parameters.

Choose Parameters: Select from the list of pre-defined paramers.

Read Parameters: specifies the parameter file (by default, dviout refers a file with the .par extension in the subdirectory .par of the directory containing dviout), and reads the parameters (cf. Q_S7).

All Parameters: Output of Parameter Setting to a file (in a  formats that can be read as dviout.par)

Non-default Parameters: Output of the dviout parameter specifications which differ from the default to a file (in a formats that can be read as dviout.par)

Mode: changes the mode.

No more dviout: turns ON/OFF no more dviout

Change Japanese font: Change Japanese TrueType fonts to be used.
Macro: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5: Execute predefined macros.

dviout specials: switch for dviout specials
source specials: switch for source specials
Embeded Fonts: switch for the usage of the fonts embedded by Font/Image Embedding
The current values of these switches are set to default values by "Presentation -> Save Presentation settings".
Check color specials: check page-independence of the color stack and modify DVI file to correct it.
Continuous Renew: Keep checking the renewal of DVI file.
Clipboard + Editor: Copy to an Editor without CTRL for dviout special `in.

Install: specifies the minimum parameters required for Installation.

Uninstall: removes all the information stored in the Registry to Uninstall dviout.


Choose Parameters
Choose Parameters <- Option
[Ok]        Show the explanation of the selected item and the button setting the corresponding parameter will appear.
[Save]      Save the current parameters of dviout with giving a name, title and comment.
[Hide]      Erace the selected item from the list (by changing the extension of the selected file to .pas
[Appear]    Recover the selected item from the list of eraced items.
[Kill]      Remove the selected item forever.
[->Hidden]  Show the list of the eraced items.
[->Current] Return to the list of the current items.
[Edit]      Edit the selected item.
[Cancel]    Quit without changing any parameter value.

Show the list of the parameter files *.par in the subdirctory *.par of the directry of dviout, if they have Tiltes.  Then one can select from the list to define the parameters.

By [Save] the current values of the parameters of dviout will be kept in a parameter file with a name, a title and explanation.
Here checking [All] means to keep all the parameters.  Otherwise the parameters different from their default values will be kept. Checking [Registry] means to show the button to write the setting in the registry and they will become the initial setting of dviout.

The format of parameter files (-Set: is useful) is given in Q_S3 but moreover it is as follows:

The line starting with ; or # is a comment line.
If the first line starts with ;, then the top continuous block of lines starting ; is called a Header.  In the Header,

If there exist lines starting with ;#, then the first line among them is the Tilte.  But the line starting with ;#e is ignored under Japanese Windows and the line starting with ;#e is ignored under Japanese WIndows.

The lines starting ;; or ;` (max: 20 lines) in the Header will be shown in the dialog to read the corresponding parameter.
If there exists a line starting with ;` in the Header, then the button to write the Parameters in Registry is appeared in the dialog.
If there exists no such line, then the selected item in the original list will be set without the dialog.


Check color specials
Check color specials <- Option
Check the page-independence of the stack of color specials.

If the stack is not page-independent and dvispc.exe exists in the directory where dviout.exe exists, a DVI file can be modified to correct the page-independence of the DVI file.
dvisrc.exe also corrects the page independence of background of the color specials and tpic specials with sh and pn command.


Change Japanese fonts
<- Option
If Japanese TrueType fonts are used in the current document, they can be replaced by other Japanese TrueType fonts. The font should be already used and hence it should not be marked by ? in Font Information.


Help Menu
Help Menu <-Menu Bar

Help Topics: Help for dviout
How to Use Help: How to use the Windows Help
Use Help in English: Check this to use English Help.
Troubles in dviout: Trouble shooting (in Japanese)
Tips on dviout: Small tips on dviout (in Japanese)
Help TeX: Support to edit a source file of TeX

System Info: System Information for dviout to work
Other Info
   Screen/File Info: Information related to files and views
   Font Info: Font Information
   Map Info: Font Mapping Information
   Buffer Info: Buffer Information
   Key table: Key Function Table
   Parameters: Parameter Table

   URL of HyperTeX: URL list in the page
   Anchors of HyperTeX: anchors of HyperTeX in the page
   Source specials: source specials in the page
   Embeded Fonts: Embedded Fonts
   Initial.par: Embedded parameters and memo

   Character Size of TrueType: Show character width of Japanese TrueType font in the page

About dviout: shows the version of dviout


Information Display
The following information is shown from help in the Menu Bar or the tool button.

You can edit the information or output to a log file or to clip board (right button of the mouse) except for the version information. You can also refer the previously shown information.

Information related to files and views(Information)
Font Information(Font Info)
Font Mapping Information(Map Info)
Buffer Information(Buffer Info)
System Information(System Info)
Key Function Table(Key Table)
Parameter Table(Parameters)
Output of Parameter Setting
URL of HyperTeX in the current page
Anchors of HyperTeX in the current page
source specials in the current page
Embedding Fonts
initial.par(cf. Embedding into DVI file)
Character size of Japanese TrueType
Version information (About dviout)
Character Information
Default Printer
Version information of TeX/pTeX


Information related to files and views
Information related to files and views Help->Other Info->Information
The following items will be shown:

- Timestamp of the displayed dvi file
- Current page and how many pages the dvi file has (the page number counted from the top the page labeled in the dvi file)
- Page size
- Horizontal and vertical size for 1000 pixel
- Actual dpi and reduction of the view
- Number of colors of the text display(2:black and white, 16:gray scale, 256: color + gray scale)
- magnification
- Loupe size, magnification, and shape
- gamma correction
- Position and size of the rectangular region if it is indicated
- Reduction and gamma correction in the four view modes
- Embedding into DVI file if exists
- HyperTeX URL of the current page and the number of labels in the link destination (If it does not exist, nothing is displayed.)
- Number of dviout specials in the current page if exist.
- Number of source specials in the current page if exist.
- Number of pause specials in the current page if exist.
- Version of dviout
- Windows system version


Font Information
Font Information Help->Other Info->Font Info
Information about the font used in the preview will be displayed.

A      B        C     D                 E                                                         F
95 cmcsc10(240)* c:\tex\fonts\pk\dpi300.gth cmcsc10.pk    PK
53 min8(300)     c:\wintex\jfms\min8.tfm MS Mincho(30x29) WinAPI

   A: Font number written in the dvi file (usually between 0 and 255)
   B: Font name
   C: Value of the required dpi
   D: *  use the substitute font for the missing font
       !  put a space for the missing font
       #  draw a black box for the missing font
       +  use the substitute font with scaling for the missing font
       t  refer the tfm file and put space for the missing font
       ^  no information available (although no substitution)
   E: Path name of the font actually used (<... means inner jfm)
       MS Mincho/C:unicode@ means that the TrueType font MS Mincho is used under unicode (/C) through subfonts and the data unicode.sfd.
   F: Font type (? means that the font has not been employed, so no information available with its font type.)
       Virtual means a Virtual font.  The fonts used by the virtual font are shown with an indent.

See Q_F13 for the font information of a letter.


Buffer Information
Buffer Information Help->Other Info->Buffer Info
The following information with the buffer will be displayed.

Bit map buffer(-bb:)
Font file buffer(-bf:)
Expanded font buffer(-br:)  The number after # denotes amount of characters appeared in the dvi file.
Subfont data buffer  The number of subfonts and the related data size.  The number after # denotes the number of the corresponding *.sfd files.
HyperTeX buffer(-href: -hname: -hbuf:)
Color BMP buffer(color image and color specials employed in the dvi file)

If files exist under Embedding into DVI file, they are shown with their size.


System Information
System Information Help->System Info
Environments where dviout works are shown.

Full pathname of dviout, version of Windows and related DLL, TeX, pTeX, default printer, environment variables TEXMFMAIN, TEXMFCNF, TEXMF, GS_LIB, PATH and TEMP, TMP (only when they are different or contain 2 byte character), Non-default Parameters.


Key Function Table
Key Function Table Help->Other Info->Key table
Displays function commands and the key bindings to each command.

For example,

Next Page : PgDn, ALT+J N [JN],  N,  n

denotes that you can Move to the next page by the four keys [Page Down], ALT+JN, N, and n.

In this example, the [JN] is the form used when defining the key assignments in the command line, dviout.par, key macro or dviout special, or when calling this function through DDE communication in "Link to Other Programs".
As with the keys following this notation([]), you can redefine their assignment in ("Property Sheets -> [Key]").


Parameter Table
Parameter Table Help->Other Info->Papameters
The table of the Parameters used in dviout is displayed.  In that table, you will see like following:

-gbox : draw frame for picture [OFF]

In this example,-gbox  is the parameter name (used in the command line, dviout.par or "Property Sheets -> [REGISTRY].")  "draw frame for picture" is the function with this parameter.  This is an on/off toggle switch parameter, the [OFF] shows the current value.


Output of Parameter Setting
You can obtain a list of all the parameter values in .par format which dviout can refer by selecting "Option->All Parameters".  By selecting "Option->Non-default Parameters", you can obtain a list for only the parameter values which differ from the default. (You can copy the list to the clip board or output to a log file.)

On the other hand, selecting "Option->Choose Parameters" and pushing [Save], the current parameter values are saved in a file with a title and a comment and will be read later setlecting from the list.

Once you save the parameter list to a file, dviout can read the file by selecting "Option->Read Parameters".  If the file is in the directory containing dviout.exe with the name of dviout.par, dviout can find  the file when start-up and reads the parameter values.

This parameter list output function would be useful when you want to save the current parameter values, check the parameter specifications, copy the parameters to other computers, or creat the common default Parameters for machines shared by many users.


Character Information
If a character in a preview window is pointed by the mouse cursor and the left button on the mouse is clicked under pushing both CTRL and SHIFT key, the information of the character is shown.  For examplle

P (50H)
Size:              25 x 25 ? in (760, 2939)-(784, 2963)
Font #68:          pcrr7t
Location:          c:t.vf
s-size/d-size:     655360/655360
location in DVI:   140364(2244CH)
line in mytext.tex:   385 - 386

Here #68 is the number of the font and the corresponding font is shown by Font Information. The line number in the source text is shown only when source specials are used.


Property Sheets
If you select Option->Setup Parameters in Menu Bar or press a tool button of "Change Settings", Property Sheets will appears. You can temporarily change values of Parameters of dviout, and also can edit the start-up value of each parameter.

  [CONTENTS], [Display], [Resolution], [Font], [Font2],
  [WinJFont], [JFont2], [Key], [Search], [HyperTeX],
  [Common], [Graphic], [Printer], [Paper], [System], [REGISTRY]


[CONTENTS]
[CONTENTS] <- Property Sheets

The value of each dviout Parameter is displayed on each sheet of the dviout property (Property Sheets).  You can edit their values in each sheet.

1. The lower part of each sheet has the [OK], [Cancel], and [Apply] buttons.  By pressing [OK] or [Apply], you can apply changes in the parameter values on each sheet to current dviout session.  The [Help] button provides descriptions of the parameters on
 the displayed sheet.

2. By pressing the [Save] and [Restore] buttons on each sheet,  you can save the parameter values on the sheet to the Registry on the disk and read the saved values to the sheet, respectively.  Saving and reading with the Registry are carried out for current mode.

3. You can choose parameters stored in the Registry which are automatically referred when dviout starts up.  You can specify them on the [REGISTRY] sheets.  (By default, all of the written Parameters in the Registry will be referred at start-up.)

4. Some sheets have [Default] button on it.  By pressing this button, you can reset the parameter values to default ones.

5. Clicking the question mark ? in the title bar on the property sheet with left button of the mouse  will add a question mark to the mouse cursor. Some items will give you help message if you click them with the cursor.

Note 1. You can use the edit function by the right button of the mouse for string edit on each sheet.  For example, you can copy a string from the Notepad or the edit box of dviout.

Note 2. For general explanations or important parameter specifications in Installation, refer the contents page in this help.


[Save]
[Save] <- Property Sheets
The values of all of the Parameters in the current property sheet are saved to the current mode of the Registry.  (If there are already set values, new values will be overwritten.)  The values of other sheets will not be saved by this button. Parameter values on other sheets are saved by "[Save]" button on each sheet.

The values for [Key] and [Loupe] are saved as common values for all modes (not for the current mode only).


[Restore]
[Restore] <-Property Sheets
Dviout reads the stored values in the current mode of the Registry for all the parameters in the current sheet.  The values of the parameters on other sheets are not changed.

If you press the [Apply] button, the parameter values on the sheet are applied to the current dviout session.


[OK]
[OK] <- Property Sheets
The values of the Parameters on the current sheet are applied  to the current dviout session ([Apply] function), and exit the property sheet.

If you have changed the parameters on the other sheets, you will be asked to select from the followings for each sheet: apply the changes on that sheet (Apply), skipping (Skip), or canceling the changes (Cancel).

If cancel is selected, the property sheet stays without exiting.


[Cancel]
[Cancel] <-Property Sheets
Any changes on the property sheets are not applied to the current dviout session. You can exit from the property sheets.

If you have pressed the [Apply] button, only the changes made after the last time the [Apply] button is pressed are canceled.


[Apply]
[Apply] <-Property Sheets
The values of Parameter on the current sheet are applied to the current dviout session.

If you have changed the parameters on other sheets, you will be asked to select from the followings: change on that sheet (Yes), skipping (No), or canceling previous changes (Cancel).

If cancel is selected, the process stops on the page being displayed.

The [Apply] button is disabled when no values of the parameters have been changed on any sheet.


If you press the [Help] button of each sheet, you can see useful explanation for that sheet.


[Default]
[Default] <- Property Sheets
The [Default] button restores the dviout default setting of Parameters.  If you press [Save] or [OK] after [Default], the restored values will be applied to the current dviout session.  If you press [Cancel], these values are not applied.


current mode
Dviout can save the Parameters in the Registry on the hard disk.  You can have 10 sets of the parameter values in 10 separated locations. Each stored location is labeled as mode0,..., mode9.

The current mode is a mode to which the current dviout session is referring. The actions such as [Save] or [Restore] in the property sheets applies to this mode.

You can find the current mode number on the [CONTENTS] and the [REGISTRY] sheet in the property sheets.  You can change the mode on the [REGISTRY] sheet.  (The current parameters are not changed.)

If you select a new mode for the current mode by "Option->Mode..." in the Menu Bar, dviout will read the values of the parameters defined by [Auto Load] for that mode. The current mode can be also changed by DDE communication.

You can specify the mode at start-up on the [REGISTRY] sheet (mode0 is  default).  Dviout refers its parameter values automatically.  This becomes the current mode at start-up.  You can also use a command parameter -mode: to specify the current mode at start-up.


[Display]
[Display] <-Property Sheets

On this sheet, you can specify parameters related to Preview.

Start: specifies the initial starting and the current view (for Parameters -BMP:).  1:, 2:, 3: and 4: specifies the views (for the -scale: parameter) corresponding to Display -> View1, 2, 3 and 4.

H-scale and V-scale specifies the reduction of the displayed size in the horizontal and the vertical direction with -dpi:.

The "reverse" is option for reversing white and black.  If this is checked, the paper color is black and the characters are displayed in white.

"contrast" adjusts the gray scale with gamma correction.  The smaller this value, the darker the characters become.   For clear display view, you should adjusted this parameter suitable for your display device.

-t: specifies how many dots in each scroll.  This will change the scroll speed.

-bright: adjusts the brightness.  The default is the maximum brightness of 255.


gamma correction
The tone of the intensity levels of gray scale are adjusted.

If black is "0" and white is "1", the intermediate intensity levels are represented by a number x between 0 and 1.  If the gamma correction value is y, then x is corrected by x^y.  The correction value closer to zero would result in the darker intensity level.


gray scale
When a monochrome image is reduced in size, employing the intermediate brightness  of intensity levels (gray color) will result in a better display view.

For example, if the size is reduced by half in both the vertical and horizontal directions, four dots are converted into one dot.  In this case, the intensity of the reduced dot is changed to a gray color. The level of the gray color is determined by how many dots have black with the four dots before the reduction. In this example, the gray scale can be in levels of 0 to 4.

Dviout can have gray scale colors of 16 intensity levels at maximum.


H-scale and V-scale specify the size reduction in the horizontal and vertical directions for Preview.

Start: specifies the view for initial starting.  The current views of 1:, 2:, 3: and 4: correspond to the views for Display->View1, 2, 3 and 4.


reverse Display
The brightness of the Preview is reversed.  Colored parts are changed to their complementary colors.

Note that when a color image is read in and displayed, the complementary colors may be unnatural.

Start: corresponds to initial starting.  The current views of 1:, 2:, 3: and 4: correspond to the views for Display -> View1, 2, 3 and 4.


[Resolution]
[Resolution] <- Property Sheets

-dpi: specifies the resolution of the employing font.  When Printing, if the printer resolution does not match that of the fonts, printed result would not be proper.
This is the most important parameter.  If you need different values from the default (300 dpi), you must specify proper values. The size of Preview can be reduced by using a gray scale at a lower resolution (cf. [Display]).

-mag:  Usually, displaying and printing are based on the \magstep written in the dvi file (default).  When using a different \magstep, you must specify the value for this parameter.

-dpiv:  This specifies resolution in the vertical direction in dpi.  If the resolution in the horizontal and the vertical directions are the same, you do not have to care of this.  Only when they differ, check this option and specify the value.

-e:  This specifies the magnification or reduction in the vertical and horizontal direction.  A variable-sized font such as a Windows TrueType font is magnified or reduced according to this value. The vertical and horizontal sizes are magnified/reduced  by 1000 x the specified value.

-varf:  When the size was changed by -e:, the scale of a fixed-size fonts is changed by dviout to the correct size.  In this case, dviout will perform some smoothing for these fonts, but the display quality may become poor.


The number of dots per inch represents the resolution.


[Font]
[Font] <- Property Sheets

The important specifications of fonts are made on this sheet.

By pressing [Save], the specifications are saved in the Registry.  By pressing [Apply], the specifications are applied to the current session.  If you want the stored values in the Registry as the defaults at start-up, you should check all of the corresponding options on the [REGISTRY] sheet by pressing
 [Auto Load] and Save on the [REGISTRY] sheet.

-TEXROOT:  this specifies the string that is substituted for the ^r string in specifications of -TEXPK: and -TEXFONTS:.

-TEXPK: This is the most important parameter in dviout.  This parameter specifies the locations of European language PK fonts, European Language TrueType Fonts, Japanese JX4 format fonts, and the Japanese jfm files.  You must specify this parameter to run dviout.

Warning: Do not specify the European language tfm file for this parameter if possible except for the tfm file of the TrueType Font to be used.
In particular, do not have European language tfm files in the same directory as the Japanese language jfm files.  If you have these in the same directory, make another new directory and move all the jfm files to that directory. Then specify that directory in -TEXPK:.

You should refer to the "Examples of TEXPK Settings".  If the function for guessing for the font location by [Guess] is used, the -TEXROOT:, -TEXPK:, and -L: (and  -F: is some case) can be specified almost automatically.

-TEXFONTS: This specifies the directory name containing the tfm files.  If you want replace by space characters in correct size for missing PK fonts when you have only the tfm files, you should specify this parameter.

If you want to replace by space characters for Japanese fonts also, you should specify the location of the jfm file for this parameter.

Example
-TEXROOT:^T\fonts
-TEXPK:^r\pk\^s.^dpk;^r\public\pk\^s.^dpk;^r\ptex\jfm\^s.tfm
-TEXFONTS:^r\\tmf;^r\\jfm

-F: specification determines how to substitute for each missing font when dviout cannot find the font in -TEXPK: directories (Handling Missing Fonts).

-FB:(substitution)This is used with -F: and specifies how to substitute for the missing fonts.

  replace
The missing font is replaced by one specified by -F:.

  adjust size
The missing font is replaced by one specified by -F: as above.  If the dpi of the replaced font is different from that of the missing one, the size is adjusted.  If the substituted font is the same font type but has a different dpi, the size would be correct.

  blank
The missing font is replace by space characters. The size of the space is calculated from metric information of the font specified by -F:.  If the substitute is the same font type but has a different dpi, the replaced space becomes the correct size.

  black box
The missing font is replaced by a black box.  The size of the box is calculated from the metric information of the font specified by -F:.

When -F: is specified to font metric file (tfm file or jfm file), the missing font is always replaced by spaces even if -FB: is specified (if black box is specified, black box is substituted).

 Example
-F:.300
-FB: adjust size
This shows that only fonts of a 300 dpi resolution are used and the size is enlarged and reduced when necessary.

-L:(cut longname)The method for truncating a font name longer than 8 characters is specified (cf. Q_F4: for lcircle10).
  no part     No truncation (lcircle10)
  last part   Truncate end (lcircle1)
  middle part Cut middle (lcirle10)

Font Check: By selecting the font in the combo box on the lower right and pressing the [Check] button, you can check whether the -TEXROOT: and -TEXPK: settings are correct or not.


Handling Missing Fonts

If the missing fonts do not exist in your hard disk, the best way is to create the fonts by METAFONT (cf. Automatic Font Generation).  However, dviout can work without the missing fonts.  Typical methods for handling missing fonts are described below.

1. Replacing missing characters with blanks.
In the following example, a correct sized blank will be replaced for missing fonts when the font specified by -dpi: (default, 300 dpi) or the Font Metric File exists.   If these do not exist, the size of substitution would not be correct.

-F:.!=.;.t=.;cmr10.!
-FB:blank

In addition, you should specify the directory of font metric files by -TEXFONTS:.

Note: When "-FB: black box" is set, the missing characters are replaced by black boxes.

Note: In the above, ! denotes the resolution specified by -dpi:.  You can explicitly specify the resolution, also.

2. Replacing with a font which resembles closely with the missing one.
In the following example, the missing fonts are replaced by magnifying or reducing the font size, if a font with the resolution specified by -dpi: exists.  If the font does not exist, a cmr10 font with the same resolution as the searched one is substituted.  If that font does not exist either, the cmr10 font with the resolution specified
 by  -dpi: is scaled and used.

-F:.!=.;cmr10.=.;cmr10.!
-FB:adjust size

3. Specify how to handle individiualy for each font.
See the -F: and -FB: items ([Font]).


Font Glyph File

The font glyph files store the bitmapped data for each character.

Dviout can handle the following formats of the European language font glyph files: PK, PXL1001, PXL1002, and PXL1003 (except GF).  Since these format files contain metric information of correct space size to each next character, dviout does not need the European language Font Metric Files for these fonts.

Among the formats above, the PK font file is widely used.  The each PK font has a file name like cmr10.300pk.  Here cmr10 denotes the font name and  300 denotes the resolution (dpi).

In MS-DOS, because of the restrictions on the length of a file name,  PK files with file name like cmr10.pk are put in a subdirectory named 300.

The other possibility is to employ European Language TrueType Fonts.  If TrueType fonts are used for usual TeX fonts such as CM fonts, their quality and compatibility should be noted because there exist several kinds of them.

For pTeX (developed by ASCII Corp.) Japanese fonts, dviout can use the standard JXL4 font, TrueType Japanese font in MS Windows, or proprietary bitmapped files.  When Japanese fonts other than the JXL4 font are used, the Japanese font metric files (jfm files) are required.


Font Metric File
This file contains information about character placement, such as information about the size of each character and the standard space size to each next character.

The file has no bitmap data of characters, so has no dependence on the resolution (dpi).

This file is called the tfm file for European language and the jfm file for the ASCII pTeX Japanese font. The file extension is tfm for both.


tfm file
The Font Metric Files for European languages contain information about the character placement and size.  For example, the cmr10.tfm and `lcircle10.tfm files.

Since each European language PK font has information on the position and size of each character, dviout does not usually need the tfm file.  However, when you want to use European language TrueType fonts, you should specify the location of tfm files by -TEXPK:.

But it is desirable  not to specify European language tfm files in -TEXPK: if they are not defined in [WinJFont] to use TrueType fonts.

Note that the Japanese jfm files (min10.tfm, goth10.tfm) used in ASCII pTeX have also the tfm extension.  (These jfm files must be specified by -TEXPK:.)


jfm file
This is the Japanese Font Metric File used by ASCII pTeX.

min10.tfm and goth10.tfm are the jfm files for horizontal writing, and tmin10.tfm and tgoth10.tfm are the jfm files for vertical writing.

If you want to use Windows 95 TrueType fonts for these fonts, you must specify the location of the corresponding jfm files by -TEXPK: (Property Sheets->[Font]).

One of the Attached Programs propw makes the jfm files for TrueType Japanese proportional fonts.


FLI Font Library
Dviout can handle emTeX FLI format font libraries.

The FLI format font libraries have names like j_0.fli, lj_h.fli,..., lj_5b.fli, and lj_sli.fli.

The variable part in -TEXPK: is represented by ^f.  A string replaced by ^f is specified in the list in -TEXFLI:.

For example, when the above font library file is in the directory named c:\font, the following is specified.

-TEXPK:c:\font\lj_^f.fli^g^s;...(other search paths)
-TEXFLI:0;h;1;2;3;4;5a;5b;sli

Since only a font specification containing ^f is regarded as a FLI format library, always set with only one ^f.

The -L: option sets 2 (font name is not truncated).  Do not omit the font name.


European Language TrueType Font

By specifying the tfm files of European language TrueType font by -TEXPK:, you can use European language TrueType fonts such as CM-TrueType Font registered by Windows according to the correspondence in Property Sheets->[WinJFont].

For a default setting, set edefault for jfm/tfm files in [WinJFont] and any font for a TrueType font in [WinJFont] as a dummy.  In this case, the name of TrueType font is assumed to be same as the corresponding TeX font or -ftt: is used to define the correspondence.
Other individual definitions have priority over the default setting.

There are several TeX TrueType fonts.  However, they are not compatible to each other.  You can select code type in [WinJFont] for the translation between codes but you can also use Virtual fonts (cf. Q_F14).
---
You can use European Language TrueType font in another way as in the following but it is not recommended because some characters may be incorrect or poor.

Directly specify the European language TrueType font (ttf extension) by -TEXPK: and their tfm files by -TEXFONTS:.

When dviout use European language TrueType fonts, dviout searches the corresponding tfm file in directories specified on -TEXFONTS: or the TEXFONTS environment variable for obtaining the character width information.

If dviout cannot find required tfm files, dviout shows a warning and dviout creates a preview display only by the metric information included in the TrueType fonts.  In this case, the character positions would not be proper because the metric information in the TrueType font is not sufficient for dviout.

-ttf: controls enabling and disabling the use of European language TrueType fonts.

Example
-TEXPK:c:\windows\fonts\^s.ttf;c:\fonts\^s.^dpk;c:\fonts\jfm\^s.tfm
-TEXFONTS:c:\fonts\tfm;c:\fonts\jfm
-ttf:1


1 inch = 25.4 mm


GTH Font Library
The many PK fonts can be collected into one file as the font library.  These font libraries have been used in the former MS-DOS version of dviout/dviprt.  Usually, the file extension is gth.

For example, the 300 dpi PK font named cmr10.pk might be placed in the GTH file named c:\tex\fonts\pk300.gth.  Then this can be specified by -TEXPK: as follows.

-TEXPK:c:\tex\fonts\pk300.gth^g^s.pk

However, .gth can be omitted in the above specification since it is automatically added by default.

Other font specifications can be used by using a semicolon ; as the delimiter.  The font found first is used when searching from the beginning.


FAR Font Library
This library format is used by Japanese MicroTeX developed by ASCII Corp.  The library contains PK and PXL font files.  The file extension of FAR font library is "far".


Font Check
You can check settings the -TEXROOT: and -TEXPK:. (Property Sheets->[Font]).

You can find the font list of cmr10, line10, lcircle10, msam10, eufm10, min10 and tmin10 in the combo box.  If you select one of these (or you can input the font name), dviout will check the specification.

You can specify the resolution(dpi) of the font in the checking.

In preview of dvi file, if your specification in -TEXPK: is not proper, dviout will shows an error message such as "Font not found". In such a case, this font check would be helpful.


cmr10
Computer Modern Font Roman 10 point
This font is most popular in TeX and widely uesd.


line10
This is used to draw slanted lines in a LaTeX font.


msam10
This supplemental font provides the standard symbols used in AMSTeX and AMSLaTeX.


lcircle10
This is a LaTeX font.  It is used to draw curves, such as circles.
The font name of this exceeds eight characters, so be careful about the -L: setting.


eufm10
Euler Fraktur Medium 10 point
This is the Fraktur font (German characters) used in AMSTeX and AMSLaTeX.


min10
This Japanese font is the 10-point Mincho for horizontal writing in ASCII pTeX (most frequently used Japanese font).


tmin10
This Japanese font is the 10-point Mincho for vertical writing in ASCII pTeX  (most frequently used Japanese font for vertical writing).


-F: specification
This specification has the format of <ss>.<ds>=<so>.<do>.  When ^s matches <so> and ^d matches <do>, they are substituted to <ss> and <ds>, respectively.  Dviout will search again in the directories of -TEXPK:.  You can specify more than one substitution by delimiter of semicolons ;.  Until found, dviout will keep searching
 the substitution font from the beginning of the -F: specification.

The font names are specified in <ss> and <so>.  The resolutions (dpi) are specified in <ds> and <do>.  The following strings have special meanings:

  <so>=space     Matches all of the font names
  <do>=space     Matches all of the resolutions
  <ss>=space     Represents the original font name (^s)
  <ds>=space     Represents the original resolution (^d)
  <ds>=!            Represents the default resolution
  <ds>=t            Represents the Font Metric File with the extension changed to tfm.  In this case, dviout will search the font metric file from -TEXFONTS:, not -TEXPK:.

Examples
-F:cmr10.=.
^s is replaced by cmr10(^d keeps its original value)

-F:.t=.
Dviout searches the font metric file corresponding to the original font in the directory specified by -TEXFONTS: (simply, this is identical even for .t).

-F:.!=.;cmr10.=.;cmr10.!
In this case, ^s might be cmcsc10, ^d might be  320, and the default resolution might be 300.  Then, substitution for (cmcsc10, 320) will be done by searching successively (cmcsc10, 300), (cmr10, 320), and (cmr10.300).
In this example, only the last part can be omitted.  For this case,  dviout interpret "=." before cmr10.!.  (cf. Handling Missing Fonts)


If the [Guess] button is pressed on the [Font] property sheet, dviout will guess -TEXROOT: and -TEXPK: and set the parameter in the Property Sheet automatically.  However, this is only a guessing, so you might have to correct the setting in some case.
By pressing the [OK], [Apply], and [Save] buttons, the guessed parameter settings can be applied.

Dviout can guess the location of only European language PK fonts, Japanese jx14 fonts, Japanese jfm files, and GTH Font Library.  If the font does not exist, guessing is not possible.  Network drives are ignored.

The resolution (cf. -dpi:) must be correctly specified.

If dviout find the searched font in more than on one directory, dviout will ask you which one you want to use.

For details, refer to "[Guess] Specifications".

The defaut vaules can be set to TEXROOT/TEXPK also by the [Guess] button.


[Guess] Specifications

The guesses about the font locations for setting -TEXPK: and -TEXROOT: are done as follows:

1. Guessing is based on the four information:  the name of the disk drive or directory (paths from the root directory to the relevant directories) that should be searched, the name of European language font, the name of Japanese font, and the resolution.  Defaults for them are given in below.  (If you want to change the defaults, see the end.)

 - All of the unremovable root drives (for example, C:, D:, etc.)

 - cmr10, lcircle10, dcr10, ecr10, msam10, eufm10

 - min10, tmin10

 - Specified value of -dpi:

If MikTeX is detected, there appears a dialog where the special setting for MikTeX may be chosen without the following GUESS.

2. For the search of European language fonts, dviout will search the fonts of the given resolution and 1.2 times of that resolution in the target directory and all of its subdirectories.
For example, in the case when the resolution is 300 dpi for cmr10, dviout searches  cmr10.pk, cmr10.300pk, and cmr10.360pk.  If the font name is cmr10.pk, the string of 300 or 360 (the preceding and following characters are not numbers) must be included in the path name.

For lcircle10 and lcirclew10, dviout will also search the fonts named lcircle1,  lcirle10, lcirclew and lcirew10.

3. The search for Japanese fonts is for the corresponding JXL4 font and jfm file.
For 300 dpi in min10, min10.pxl (path name must include 1500 or 1800), min10.1500pxl, min10.1800pxl, and min10.tfm are searched for.

Note: If fonts with the same resolution are found in two locations, since either one can be used, a dialog is displayed and the user decides.  But when both the JXL4 font and the jfm file were found as Japanese font files, the former has precedence.

4. A file with the gth extension and including the number representing the resolution in the file name is registered as a file in the GTH Font Library.

5. The entire font name portion of the path of the found font is replaced by ^s.

6. The search paths are compared from the beginning for the fonts (except for the GTH and jfm files) found with both the given resolution and 1.2 times that resolution.  If the different part corresponds to the string representing the resolution and matches the preceding part, that string is replaced by ^d (^l for a jx14 font).
This is repeated as much as possible.  For example,

C:\tex\pk300\cmr10.300pk->C:\tex\pk300\^s,^dpk
C:\tex\pk300\cmr10.360pk->C:\tex\pk300\^s.^dpk

or

C:\tex\pk300\cmr10.300pk->C:\tex\pk^d\^s.^dpk
C:\tex\pk360\cmr10.360pk->C:\tex\pk^d\^s.^dpk

7. The resolution string is replaced by ^d (or ^l) for the path of the European language font converted once in 6 above or the path of the Japanese JXL4 font.
However, if resolution strings at two or more locations are included in the path name, only the last matching part is replaced.

For example, if C:\tex\pk300\cmr10.300pk was searched for and a 360 dpi cmr10 font was found, C:\tex\pk300\^s.^dpk results.

In this step, since the font name has already been replaced by ^s, the processing is normal even if the part matching the resolution string is included in the font name.

8. If the above process is performed and the same path name arises, the duplicate is deleted.

9. If the first font is not found under the given resolution and the fonts is registered by the Windows system as a TrueType font and the environment variable TEXMFMAIN or TEXMF is defined, then the corresponding path name is defined as %TEXMFMAIN%\fonts\\^s.tfm or %TEXMF%\fonts\\^s.tfm.

10. Examine the searched path name for the given resolution of the first European language font.  The first part is compared to the first parts of all of the other searched path names.
If there are common parts up to some position, whether a minimum results for the sum of the lengths of the strings defined in -TEXROOT: and -TEXPK: is examined to determine common part setting.
If the environment variable TEXMFMAIN or TEXMF is defined and it matches to the top of the common part, the top is replaced by ^T.
Then this common part is set in -TEXROOT:.
The path name including this at the beginning replaces that part by ^r.

11. Next, again examine whether the file (file where ^d replaces the string for the resolution) that matches *.^dpk is in a directory under the directory that should be searched.
If the directory exists, ^s.^dpk is appended to the directory name.  If possible, this is replaced by ^r in the first part.
As a result, if something other than what was obtained in 10 was found, the path name of the searched font file is displayed.  The user's decision on whether the part replaced above is also included in the search path is prompted for in the dialog.  If not included, the next directory is searched.
In this case, ^d  is replaced in two or more places in 6.  If the directories reached have the same path names, the comparison is performed correctly and duplication is avoided.

12. If the path name of Europian fonts containing the substring ^d also contanins one of \public\cm\, \public\latex\, \ams\symbols\, \ams\extracm\, then this part is replaced by \\. This replacement is done at most once for each path name.

The path names matching this replaced path name with \\ (cf. kpathsearch) are eraced to avoid duplications.

13.  The path names obtained in the above procedure are set successively in -TEXPK:.  Furthermore, if there is a path name for the GTH file, that is also set.

14, If the path name corresponding to the first font is ^r\...\texmf\fonts\pk\..., the path name ^r\...\texmf\vf\\^s.vf is added for Virtula fonts.

15. If lcircle1(or lcirclew) is found, -F: is set to
     lcircle1.=lcircle10.;lcirclew.=lcirclew10.
 However, if lcirle10(or lcirew10) is found, -F: is set to
     lcirle10.=lcircle10.;lcirew10.=lcirclew10.
 If both are found, the matches are set.
If the GTH file is set to -TEXPK:, both are regards as having been found.

16. If the jfm file is set in -TEXPK: (file name of ^s.tfm), the suitability of the corresponding European language tfm file is checked.  -L: is set so that a long font name is used unmodified.

Note: The part other than the resolution of the default used in the guess can be specified as follows by the dviout.gss file in the directory containing dviout.exe.  (If this does not exist, the default is used.)

Three settings are written in order.  Multiple settings are delimited by semicolons ; .
Although each item can be omitted, if the European language font specification is omitted, later Japanese font specifications must be omitted.  (If omitted, the default is used.)
 A line beginning with a pound sign # is ignored.

For example,

#drive
C:\ptex;D:
#pk fonts
cmr10;lcircle10;ecr10
#jxl4/jfm fonts
min10;goth10

or

cmr10;msam10;eufm10

or

C:\tex;C:\ptex

Note that the first European language font has a special meaning (cf. 9).

Note: A font with a name of eight or more characters in MS-DOS is truncated to an 8-character file name.  Since long file names can be used in Windows 95 and NT, these operating systems are preferred.
Therefore, -F: is used by the guessing function, and only the frequently used lcircle10 and lcirclew10 LaTeX fonts are supported.  The -L: setting is the default.


[Font2]
[Font2] <- Property Sheets

-gen: If dviout cannot find the missing font or the substitute font (specified in -F:), METAFONT will start, and create the missing font, store them to the disk, and dviout will use them.   A template file describing how to create the fonts can be specified by -gen: parameter.  If not specified, Automatic Font Generation
 would not work.

-ftt:  This specifiles the file defining the map of the TeX fonts to TrueType fonts. This map is applied preceeding the corresponce in [WinJFont].

-TEXSUBF: Indicates the location of SFD files *.sfd for subfonts.

-TEXPKD: When the index file of PK fonts is created and specified in -TEXPK: instead of the PK font files themselves, the directories from the root indicating the locations of actual PK fonts are specified by -TEXPKD:.
This parameter has been used in the former MS-DOS version when large PK fonts or many fonts are employed (for example, NTT JTeX), .

-TEXFLI: When the emTeX FLI font library is used, this parameter is employed. If the variable part of the font library name is represented by ^f in -TEXPK:,  the actual font names for ^f is listed in -TEXFLI:.

-A: Specifies the range for the resolution of fonts which dviout searches for.

-ttf: This parameter switches enabling or disabling the use of the European Language TrueType Fonts or specifies that the European Language TrueType Fonts are not used if the font is smaller that the given size.
To validitate the change of this parameter for all fonts, push [Flush].  Otherwise this is applied only to new fonts that have never been used by dviout.

-c: Usually, when the dvi file is created, the checksum ID of the tfm file of the dvi file is registered in the dvi file.  When this parameter box is  checked, dviout will check whether the ID matches the ID of the employed PK font in dviout.

-virtual: This parameter switches enabling or disabling the use of Virtual Fonts.

-Fkeep: If this parameter box is checked, dviout registers the location of the font used frequently.  This would make the start up of dviout faster.

[Flush]: This clears the register of the font location stored by -Fkeep:.

-Fod: The font is searched on demand.


Automatic Font Generation

If you want to employ Automatic Font Generation Function, you must specify the font creation procedure in a file of Template for Font Creation.  The template file must be specified  -gen:.  According to the template file, dviout creates the batch file and executes it.  The batch file contains information on such as the required font names and sizes.

Of course, first of all, you should check that METAFONT is already installed and works properly (cf. Q_F6).

If METAFONT sources for missing fonts are not found or the specified parameters are not proper, some fonts would not be created automatically.  Even so, dviout create a batch file which describe necessary routines.  Executing this batch file by manual, you can create missing fonts.

The dviout package has a sample of the template file named "template". You should refer this file.  The format of this file is following:

If you use only one line at %2nd, you can write this line in -gen: directly instead of the template file.  In this case, add an apostrophe `  at the beginning of the specification line.

A line which starts with # is a comment line, and this line is not output to the batch file.  However, there is only one exception.  If the second character is an exclamation point !, the line is output unchanged.

# This statement is not output.
#! This line is output..

The template file has four sections.  Each section is delimited by the three lines beginning with the % character

%1st
%2nd
%3rd

The section before the line of %1st, some special parameters is specified.  You can specify four parameters in this section.

auto=no : This disables the automatic font generation which is done by a child process.  Only the batch file with the name specified in gen_font is generated.

extra_size=300 : In addition to the missing font(s) in required  resolution, you may want to create that font(s) with different resolution.   In that case, you can specify the resolution in dpi for that fonts.  The value of this parameter is also referred in the ^e calculation.

gen_tmp= : This specifies the name of the batch file used in a child process.  The file name must be a full path name.  The default is gen_tmp.bat in the directory indicated by the TMP or TEMP environment variables (Current Directory if it does exists).

gen_font= : This specifies the name of the batch file for creating a font when the child process is not successful.  The file name must be a full path name.  The default is gen_font.bat.

mode_name= : This specifies the relation between the dpi value and the METAFONT mode name.  The format is

mode_name=<dpi value>:<mode name>

For example, "mode_name=300:CanonCX" denotes that the mode CanonCX is employed when font generation for 300 dpi.
You can specify this mode_name line repeatedly in the template file.  However put these lines after the "extra_size=" line.

In the second part, between %1st and %2nd, preprocessing commands for batch file such as echo off are specified.  Postprocessing commands such as error processing are specified in the fourth part, after %3rd.

In the third part, between %2nd and %3rd,  the actual routine for font creation is specified.  You can use the notation in the form "^ + lowercase letters (for example, ^s)" to specify command information for font generation.  In execution of the font generation process, following strings in the command are interpreted (replaced) as

^s : the name of a missing (required) font.
^m : the magnification of the missing font.
^d : the size (dpi x magnification) of the font.
^D : the dpi of the font.
^M : the fraction equals to ^d/^D.  For example, if^d=1500 and ^D=600, then ^M=2+300/600.
^n : the mode name for the dpi.
^N : the mode name for dpi set by "extra_size=."
^e : (dpi x magnification) specified in the first section of the template file.

When some fonts are missing in a dviout session, you may also want to create the font in different resolution from required one. In this case, for example,  specify the dpi as "extra_size=360" in the first section of the template file.

If you want to output a string containing the caret ^ to a batch file, use two carets ^^.  For example, ^^s will result in a string ^s in a batch file.

Here is some examples of the Template for Font Creation.


Template for Font Creation

Example 1 : Example using mktexpk or MakeTeXPK of kpathsea

%1st
%2nd
mktexpk ^s ^d ^D ^M
%3rd

For this purpose, mktexpk must be on your path.
If a vesion of mktexpk is used, the above line contains mktexpk should be

mktexpk --dpi ^d --bdpi ^D --mag ^M ^s

The above mktexpk should be replaced MaKeTeXPK if MaKeTeXPK is used.

In this example, the mode name is referred to "MAKETEXPK_MODE_..." defined in texmf.cnf.
If you want define a mode name explicitly, see Example 2.

Note that the line after %2nd must be
mktexpk ^s ^d ^D ^M ^n
or
mktexpk --dpi ^d --bdpi ^D --mag ^M --mfmode ^n ^s
 or specify the mode name instead of ^n (cf. the attached utility\template.kp0 and utility\template.kps)

If the font creation command is written in one line at %2nd, you can directly specify them in -gen:, for example,

`c:\usr\local\bin\mktexpk.exe ^s ^d ^D ^M CanonCX

with ` at the beginning.

Example 2

###########################################
mode_name=118:bitgraph
mode_name=300:CanonCX
#
%1st
#
echo off
rem
#
%2nd
#
virmf &cmplain :=^n; mag:=^m; input ^s
gftopk ^s.^dgf ^s.pk
rem
#
%3rd
#
echo Done!
############################################

If the font "cmr10 scaled 5000" is not found, gen_tmp.bat with the following contents is created and executed in the child process.

echo off
rem
virmf &cmplain \mode:=bitgraph; mag:=5.000000; input cmr10
gftopk cmr10.590gf cmr10.pk
rem
echo Done!

If the child process failed to create the font "cmr10 scaled 5000", gen_font.bat with the following contents is created.

echo off
rem
virmf &cmplain \mode:=bitgraph; mag:=5.000000; input cmr10
gftopk cmr10.590gf cmr10.pk
rem
echo Done!


[Flush]
This deletes the records of locations of frequently used fonts.  These records would make start-up of dviout faster (cf.-Fkeep:).

Note: These font records are also deleted when the -TEXPK: or -TEXROOT: parameters are changed, when the record format version is different, or when font files are moved.
Probably you do not have to use this [Flush] button so often but when the setting of European Language TrueType Fonts is changed, it is recommended to push this button.


Virtual font

Virtual fonts are imaginary fonts to use various format of fonts in TeX such including PS fonts.  Usually a dviware replaces the virtual font by an actual font according to the information in the virtual font file (with the extension vf or ovf in case of Omega).

To use virtual font in dviout, set -virtual: (Property Sheets->[Font2]) ON and indicate in TEXPK: the place of VF files (^s.vf or ^s.ovf) and the fonts referred by the VF file.
(For example, see Q_F14).

The fonts referred by VF file are shown with an indent by Font Information(Help->Font Info).

These fonts can be made by Automatic Font Generation (-gen:).

If PSNFSS(the package to use PS fonts in LaTeX) is used, it is convenient to define a mktexpk command corresponding to gsftopk in -gen:. The location of the generated fonts should be indicated by -TEXPK:.


[WinJFont]
[WinJFont] <- Property Sheets

This sheet specifies the parameters for use of Windows fonts as the TeX fonts whose tfm/jfm files are searched by -TEXPK:

First, specify the font name used by TeX jfm/tfm file.  Next, select the TeX font for the jfm/tfm file which you have selected.  Then, press [Define] to register.

Windows Font List : Available fonts are listed in the combo box (256 sets at maximum).

[Add Font]  By pressing this button, a Windows font can be selected and it is added to the list of the available fonts.

[Change Font]  By pressing this button, a font displayed in the combo box of TrueType fonts can be exchanged to another one.

H scale : Size in the horizontal direction of the Windows font (default is 1000)

V scale : Size in the vertical direction of the Windows font (default is 1000)

jfm/tfm : font names used in TeX.  Japanese fonts are indicated (min, tmin, goth, tgoth, etc.) without numbers at the end.  You can add a font by direct inputting the name and pressing [Define].
If there is a setting with the name of default, this is used when an undefined Japanese font appears for horizontal writing (with a warning message).  For vertical writing, the setting named tdefault is employed.
The setting named edefault is used for European Language TrueType Fonts.  This setting means that if a font in TeX matches a tfm file in -TEXPK: and if the font is not defined in [WinJFont], then the European Language TrueType Font with the same name is used.
The corresponding Windows font defined to edefault is a dummy.

Flat Type/Long Type, Slanted Type, Orientation:  These settings are made for each selected TeX font.  The orientation sets either a font for horizontal writing or a font for vertical writing.

H position: The position in the horizontal direction of the selected TeX font is adjusted.  (1000 is the horizontal size of about one character.)

V position: The position in the vertical direction of the selected TeX font is adjusted.  (1000 is the vertical size of about one character.)

code type: This selects the translation between character codes in TeX and European Language TrueType Fonts.

[Define]  This assigns a Windows font displayed in the combo box for a TeX (jfm/tfm) font displayed at the bottom left of the sheet.

[Remove]  This removes the TeX (jfm/tfm) font which is displayed at the bottom left of the sheet from the registration (when the displayed Windows font corresponds to this).  If there were no TeX Japanese (jfm) font corresponding to the Windows font displayed in the comb box, that Windows font will be removed from the list.
If you press this button, dviout will ask you confirmation, then you will see which font will be removed.

Note: You can specify only one value to H scale: or V scale: for each TrueType font in the list.  If you want to specify and use a font with different size adjustments for the same Windows font, add the font to the list as a new one by pressing [Add Font] and specify another value(s) to H scale: or V scale:  .

Note: If you have changed the setting of European Language TrueType Fonts, you should push [Flush] in [Font2] to erase the records of the locations of fonts.

Note: If you want the specifications made on this sheet as default at start-up, press the [Save] button.
If dviout reads -vfn: parameter at start-up, this will work.  If not,  change -vfn: to "Auto Load" item on the [REGISTRY] sheet.  (Press "Auto Load", then "+" will be added to -vfn:.  Then press [Save].)


TrueType Font List
This is a list of the fonts supported by Windows.  You can change or add by pressing [Change Font] or [Add Font].  Up to 256 can be specified.


H scale in [WinJFont]
The size in the horizontal (vertical for vertical writing) direction of the displayed Windows font selected from the list is adjusted.  The default is 1000.

When a font with a different value is used in the same Windows font, [Add Font] prepares the fonts in multiple lists.


V scale in [WinJFont]
The size in the vertical (horizontal for vertical writing) direction of the displayed windows font selected from the list is adjusted.  The default is 1000.

When a font with a different value is used in the same Windows font, [Add Font] prepares the font in multiple lists.


[Define] in [WinJFont]
The (one) mapping between the font used in TeX and the Windows font used with it is defined for display.


[Remove] in [WinJFont]
If the displayed TeX font (jfm/tfm) is mapped to the displayed Windows font, this mapping is deleted and the displayed TeX font is removed from the list by [Remove].

If the displayed Windows font is not mapped to any TeX font (jfm/tfm), the font is removed from the list by [Remove].

In either of the above cases, the font to be removed is displayed and a prompt asks whether to remove it from the list.  If neither of the above happens, the mapping is not changed, but the display changes to the mapped font.


[Change Font]
[Change Font] displays the dialog for selecting Windows fonts supported by Windows.  Check Japanese TT to indicate Japanese/Chinese (non-European) fonts.

A Windows font displayed on the sheet can be replaced by the selected font.  Check off [TrueType] if the font to be selected is not TrueType.


[Add Font]
[Add Font] displays the dialog for selecting fonts supported by Windows.  Check Japanese TT to indicate Japanese/Chinese  (non-European) fonts.

The selected font can be added at the end of the TrueType list on the sheet. The maximal number of fonts in the list is 256.  Check off [TrueType] if the font to be selected is not TrueType.


jfm/tfm in [WinJFont]
This is a list of the font names used in TeX.  However, the name is Japanese font name without the numbers at the end.  For example, min corresponds to min10, min8, etc (cf. -ftt:).

By typing in a new font and pressing the [Define] key, the font can be added and the Windows font used with it can be defined.

When selected from the list, the mapping defined for it and the settings are displayed.

The edefault is for undefined Fonts and the Windows fonts with the same name as in dvi file will be used by this setting.

When the name of default is set and an unresolved Japanese font for horizontal writing appears, its settings are used. For vertical writing, the name of tdefault is set.


Flat font in [WinJFont]
The flat type/long type font is defined for the TeX font.

The flat type is defined by a reduction in the vertical length.  The long type is defined by an expansion in the vertical length.


Slanted font in [WinJFont]
A slanted font is defined for the TeX font.


Orientation in [WinJFont]
The orientation of the TeX font is defined.  Usually, it is either horizontal or vertical.  The latter is indicated if a character is rotated by 90 degrees and the top of the character is on the left under the display by [Change Font],


H position in [WinJFont]
The position in the horizontal direction is corrected for a Tex font. The width of one character is about 1000.  The default is zero, and the character is offset to the right (below for vertical writing) by a positive value.  When a slanted type is used, correction is probably needed.


V position in [WinJFont]
The position in the vertical direction is corrected for a TeX font.  The width of one character is about 1000.  The default is zero, and the character is offset to the below (left for vertical writing) by a positive value.  When a slanted type is used, correction is probably needed.


Japanese TT
Check this to Add/Change Japanese/Chinese etc. fonts.


code type
This defines code the translation between character codes of TeX fonts and those of European Language TrueType Fonts(Property Sheets->[WinJFont]->code type).

The coresponding name of the font or edefault should be set in jfm/tfm.

Bakoma: This fits most TrueType fonts and translates the codes of characters in TeX as follows:

0x00 - 0x09 -> 0xa1 - 0xaa
0x0a - 0x20 -> 0xad - 0xc3
0x7f        -> 0xc4

WinTeX: This fits TrueType fonts used by Impress's WinTeX

direct: No translation is used.  One can use Virtual fonts to define arbitrary code translation.


Select TrueType font
Underline, Strikeout are valid only if [Graphic]->color specials:(-cmode:) is patch2.

If TrueType is ckecked off, the font which is not TrueType can be selected.  The font can be used only if -cmode: is patch2.

If UniCode is checked, Windows font is obtained by using unicode.
In this case, the character codes (which may be transformed through virtual fonts) are assumed to be unicode but if JIS->Uni is checked, then the character codes are assumed to be JIS code (Japanese Kanji codes, one of multi-byte character codes) and are transformed into unicode.


[JFont2]
[JFont2] <- Property Sheets

On this sheet, settings for Japanese fonts are specified.  These specification is not limited to Windows TrueType Japanese fonts.

-TEXKNJ:  Specifies the bitmapped Japanese font file with a fixed size (a special format only for dviout).

-JC:  This specifies conversions of character codes in the Japanese font.

-vfn:  This specifies the configuration file (default file name of dviout.vfn) for Windows TrueType fonts or "Sho-tai Club" fonts.  This must be in the full path name.  You can not employ this parameter with [WinJFont]. Specify only when using a font of the "Sho-tai Club" font format or TrueType Japanese fonts not supported by Windows system.

-S:  This adjusts the character size of a Japanese font for pTeX (developed by ASCII Corp.).  This affects all the the Japanese fonts.  The adjustments for [WinJFont] can be used at the same time.

-J:  This adjusts the base line position of the Japanese font for pTeX.

By -ntt specification, the Japanese font in NTT JTeX can be replaced by Japanese fonts for pTeX.  For example, you can use Windows TrueType Japanese fonts for NTT JTeX.

-nttF:  In NTT JTeX, you can add new Japanese fonts by \jfont command.  You can use pTeX Japanese fonts for these new fonts. This -nttF parameter spcifies which pTeX font is used for the new font in NTT JTeX.

-G:  Define Gothic fonts (This has meaning for por man's bold or dviprt Printing by LBP Driver).

-g:  Check when you want to use Japanese fonts for vertical writing  for Japanese fonts for horizontal writing.

-Jfm: Check if you use jfm data in dviout.

-Jbt: Check when the baseline of the Windows TrueType Japanese font is adjusted according to the corresponding jfm file.

-Jgt: Check when the glue of small letters of Windows TrueType Japanese fonts is adjusted according to the corresponding jfm file.


-ntt specification
By specifying -ntt:, you can employ pTeX Japanese fonts for dvi files typeset by NTT JTeX (Property Sheets->[JFont2]).

As usual setting of font location in pTeX, put jfm files in a separate directory from that of the European language tfm files.  The location of jfm files is specified by ^s.tfm in -TEXPK:.

Be careful when using the -L: specification, because font names in NTT JTeX and ezjTeX exceed eight characters (they should not be truncated or only the middle of the font name can be cut out.)

In NTT JTeX, file names such as dmj* are used for Mincho and dgj* for Gothic. In JaWaTeX, file names such as mj* are used for  Mincho and bj* for Gothic.

If "-ntt:" option is "on", for example, dviout substitutes min10 font of pTeX for dmj* or mj*, and goth10 font of pTeX for dgj* or bj*.  Then dviout referes
-TEXPK: and -TEXKNJ: and determines employing Japanese fonts, in the same manner as for pTeX dvi files.

Therefore, even if you do not have dmj* or mj* fonts, you can use JXL4 fonts or Windows 95 TrueType Japanese fonts, as for pTeX dvi files.

If you add new fonts by \jfont command in NTT JTeX, substitution for these new fonts are specified in -nttF:.


Dviout can handle fixed-size bitmapped Japanese fonts in the following three special formats by specifying -TEXKNJ:.

1.  The bitmapped data of a Japanese font with the same vertical and horizontal sizes are arranged in order by JIS code.

2.  The bitmapped data of a Japanese font with the same size arranged in order by JIS code compressed by knjtopk.exe (PK Japanese font).  You can select from two compression formats.

3.  A font in which only the bitmapped data of a Japanese font with a fixed size for several codes are collected (KG Japanese font).  This can be used for special additional characters.

For more details about the Bitmapped Japanese Font Formats, see the manual for the MS-DOS version of dviout.


Bitmapped Japanese Font Formats

The format for a fixed-size, uncompressed Japanese bitmapped font has the following simple structure.

The size of one character in a Japanese font is n x n (dot units).  m is the largest integer that does not exceed (n + 7)/8.  The data for one character has the usual format of m x n bytes arranged from the high-order column of the character's bitmap, advancing from left to right with m bytes in each column in order to the bottom row.

If the number of dots in the horizontal width is not divisible by 8, zeros are inserted in the remaining low-order bits in the last byte in each row.  The high-order bits are on the left side.

These are arranged in the font file in the JIS code order.  If the data for the J character becomes J = (H, L) (H is the high-order byte, and L is the low-order byte), the JIS codes must begin after

   ((H-33)x94 + L - 33) x m x n

bytes were skipped from the beginning of the file.

2.  The above Japanese font (or different vertical and horizontal sizes similar to above) can be handled as a font file compressed by the unique knjtopk.exe function in the dviout.

This becomes

  knjtopk c:\font\jfont\kanji.24 temp.24 24 24 H

c:\font\jfont\kanji.24 is an original font, and tmp.24 is the compressed font.  The first 24 in the two numerical parameters is the number of horizontal dots.  The last 24 is the number of vertical dots.

The standard compression of the PK font or the expansion and compression used by the JXL4 font compress by using the same method.  The last parameter H above sets this expansion and compression.

3. The KG Japanese font format is suited for registering and handling a small number of characters.  The character bitmapped data is stored without being compressed.  Similar to the compressed Japanese font described above, the beginning of the file becomes

0, 0, 247, id[1], width[2], height[2], byte_width[2], dummy[22]

where id becomes "G" to distinguish this font from fonts with other formats.  "dummy" is not used and is set to zero.  The following characters are the JIS codes of the inserted characters.

total[2], code[total][2]

where "total" is the number of included characters, "code[0],..., code[total-1]" are the JIS codes in the recorded order (same two-byte integer as width[2]).  Following this and without any gap, the uncompressed character data (in the format described in 1) are arranged until the end.

The data size of one character is (width + 7)/8 x height.  Since the JIS code is placed in the Jth position when code[n-1] is equal to J, data is present from the location of (width + 7)/8 x height x j + 2 x code + 34 bytes from the beginning.


[Key]
[Key] <- Property Sheets

Various functions can be bound to keys.  The keys that you can bind are:

Normal keys (ASCII codes 0x21 - 0x7f)
CTRL + letter(ASCII codes 0x00 - 0x1f)
Functions keys(Fn1 - Fn12)
SHIFT + Function keys(SFn1 - SFn12)
User buttons on the right side of the option tool bar(Button, User1 - User5 (cf.Q_V10))

You cannot bind to 0x00 (CTR+ + @), 0x20 (Space), 0x08 (CTRL + H), 0x09 (CTRL + I), 0x0c (CTRL + M), 0x1f.

[Define]  If you select a function (Function:) and a key (Key:) and press [Define] key, that function (if another function has already been assigned, it is canceled) will be bound to that key.  You can bind  one function to more than one key.

[Clear]  The function assigned to the selected key is cleared.

[Search]  This checks and shows the key binding for the function in the combo box on the left side.

[All Clear]  All of the key bindings to functions are cleared.

[Save]  This saves key bindings to functions in the property sheet to the Registry.  The saved bindings are common for every mode, not local for the current mode.  You can specify whether to load the saved key bindings at each start-up by [REGISTRY] for each mode independently.

[Restore]  The key bindings to functions saved in the Registry are loaded to the property sheet.


Define in [Key]
The function selected by the Function: list box is defined for the key selected by the Key: combo box.

The function defined previously to the key is canceled.


Clear in [Key]
The function assigned to the key selected in the Key: list box is cleared.


Search in [Key]
The function assigned to the key selected in the Key: list box is searched for and displayed in the Function: combo box on the left side.


All Clear in [Key]
The definitions of the functions for all of the keys in the Key: list box are canceled.


Function in [Key]
Each type of function in Function: and which key the function is assigned to are displayed.

The two letters displayed by [ ] such as [JN] are used to assign the function to a key by dviout.par or the command line, or represent the function by DDE to Link to Other Programs. The keys displayed after this are changeable.


Key in [Key]
The following keys appear.

Normal keys(ASCII codes 0x21 - 0x7f)
CTRL + letter(ASCII codes 0x00 - 0x1f)
Function keys(Fn1 - Fn12)
SHIFT + Function keys(SFn1 - SFn12)
6 buttons on the right side of the option tool bar(User1 - User5, Button)


Key Symbol

The following sets of the top two letters in lines are Key Symbols which represent key functions.  They are used in Key Macro, XTYP_EXECUTE transaction [Function( )] in DDE, dviout specials, parameter -Set: etc.  In these cases, Key Symbols are indicated successively.
They are interpreted and executed from the top but

If they are separated by ;, then the part after this is postponed to be interpreted until the former part is interpreted and executed.

If a small letter is used in a Key Symbol, then the corresponding execution is postponed until the part after this is interpreted (and executed if necessary).

!A  Stop Draw
!B  Recover Draw
!C  Return to Cover sheet
!D  Scroll down
!E  Foot of a Page
!F  Quit Fit/Full
!G  Renew Presentation background
!H  Head of a Page
!I  Renew if necessary
!J  Relate DVI file to dviout
!K  Put dviout in Start Menu
!L  Scroll left
!M  Maximize Window
!N  Presentation Off
!P  Presentation On
!Q  One page
!R  Scroll right
!S  Supspend Cover sheet
!T  Cut edge Off
!U  Scroll up
!V  To Reverse
!W  To Normal
!X  Left of a Page
!Y  Right of a page
!Z  Cut edge On
D1  View 1
D2  View 2
D3  View 3
D4  View 4
D6  16 pages
DA  Loupe Smaller
DB  Blacker
DC  Color special
DD  Loupe Reduce
DE  Loupe Bigger
DF  Fit
DG  Loupe Magnify
DH  Change Mouse
DI  Graphics
DL  Full
DM  Magnify
DN  Region
DP  Color replace
DR  Reduce
DS  Cross pages
DT  Two pages
DU  Loupe Measure
DV  Reverse
DW  Whiter
DW  Rev-two pages
DX  Recover from Region
DY  Y-two pages
F1  Open last file
FH  File History list
FN  Renew File
FO  Open File
FP  Print
FQ  Quit
FS  Save as Image
FX  Exit & Save
HA  About dviout
HB  Buffer Info
HF  Font Info
HH  Online Help
HI  Screen/File Info
HK  Key table
HP  Parameter Info
HS  System Info
J0  Next Page +50
J1  Previous Page +50
J2  Previous Page +20
J3  Previous Page +10
J4  Previous Page +5
J5  Previous Page +2
J6  Next Page +2
J7  Next Page +5
J8  Next Page +10
J9  Next Page +20
JB  Bottom Page
JD  Down to next page
JE  Head of next page
JF  Former History
JG  Goto Mark
JH  Page History list
JI  Input Page Number
JJ  HyperJump ON/OFF
JL  Latter History
JM  Mark page
JN  Next Page
JP  Previous Page
JQ  Quit History
JR  Mark range
JS  Last file
JT  Top Page
JU  Up to previous page
JV  Foot of previous page
JX  Exchange Mark
N0  Presentation with general screen
N1  Presentation with white screen
N2  Presentation with black screen
N3  Presentation with white back
N4  Presentation with black back
N5  Cover bottom
N6  Cover right
N7  Cover left
N8  Cover bottom + right
N9  Cover bottom + left
NB  Draw blue
NC  erace line
ND  Draw red
NE  Cut edge On/Off
NF  Cover sheet Off
NF  Cover sheet On
NG  Draw green
NG  Save Presentation settings
NI  Draw line
NK  Draw black
NL  Use left button
NN  Presentaion mode On/Off switch
NO  Cover sheet
NP  Cover sheet On for Pause
NR  Use right button
NT  Draw thick
NX  Draw box
O1  Macro 1
O2  Macro 2
O3  Macro 3
O4  Macro 4
O5  Macro 5
OC  source special ON/OFF
OD  Non-default Parameters
OP  Choose Parameters
OS  Setup Parameters
OV  dviout special ON/OFF
PL  Landscape
SD  Downward Search
SF  Dialog for Search
SU  Upward Search
VC  Change Tool Buttons
VE  Small Editor
VP  View Page slider
VR  View Scroll bar
VS  View Status bar
VT  View Tool bar
VV  View Reverse Move Button
VW  Show Warning


[Search]
[Search] <- Property Sheets

This configuration relates to String Searches.
It can specify how to display the string that was found.

The "normal mode" and "reverse mode" specify whether the Preview is a reverse screen.  Specify the normal screen.  (Since the previous mode is entered, changing is not normally needed.)  When set to reverse, the colors become their complementary colors.

When using both coloring by search strings and another HyperTeX, "merging" and "replacing" specify whether to mix or replace the colors for the strings specified.

Color: One of "character" (changing color of characters), "box
fill"(coloring background) or "line"(drawing lines) or"line+char"(drawing lines and changing color of characters) can be selected.
The color is chosen from given 8 colors or the reverse (with background).
If "line" is selected, one of "underline"(whose position is at base line or the bottom of the box) or "overline" and one of the "left side" or "right side" in case of vertical writing can be selected.

These choice corresponds to -search:.

"up to (-sdpi:)" specifies up to what resolution (dpi) to assign colors.
These are the values of the compressed gray scale.  The gray scale compressed by one fourth for dpi=300 is regarded as 75.  For example, if 150 is set when dpi=300, colors are not assigned when the gray scale display is at the same magnification.
dviout expands each page into an image file in the BMP file format.  This specification is used with the objective of limiting the color assignments since a larger file size results from color assignments (when there is no enough memory).

Coloring: can select whether to assign colors to only the string found by Search, or to assign colors to all of the relevant strings on the page.

Cursor: specifies whether to move the mouse cursor to the position of the string that was found.  If colors cannot be assigned, such as for a monochrome display, this option can be specified.

-sFont: specifies the fonts (of symbols or graphics) which should be excluded from the String Search.


[HyperTeX]
[HyperTeX] <- Property Sheets

A string specified by HyperJump is displayed in color.  If that location is clicked by the left button of the mouse, a HyperJump is executed.  HyperJump is implemented by HyperTeX specials.

You can specify the color for highlighting of the linked strings as the same manner as the specification in [Search]. Refer to that description.  The value of "up to:" specified by [Search] is applied also to the colors assigned in HyperTeX.

disable hyperJump(-hyperoff:)  HyperTeX specials are ignored.
direct outerJump(-hyperoff:)  When the HyperJump is to other than dvi files, the dialog box does not appear to ask whether to execute.

In dviout, unless the dvi file is changed, the scanned part of the label specified by HyperJump or the jump destination and its position is saved to memory as the cache.  The buffer size for this memory can be specified.
If the cache is exceeded over the buffer size, the cache will be cleared.  If this limit is exceeded on one page, the processing is not correct.  For dvi files containing no HyperJumps, this cache buffer is not allocated in the memory.

Note: By default, a HyperJump to a dvi file in the display is executed immediately by clicking the left button of the mouse.  But for a jump to other than dvi files, the dialog box will be displayed.
When the left button of the mouse is clicked while pressing the CTRL key or the target file is executable or uncertain, the dialog box is always displayed.

URL(-href:)         Number of HyperJump
Name(-hname:)       Number of labels for the jump destination
String buf(-hbuf:)  Size of the string buffer for saving the jump destination or label name

non-default Browser(-Browser:)   If you want to use a browser other than the default WWW browser supported by the system, check this box and specify its path name.


HyperTeX specials

HyperTeX incorporates the HTML language into TeX.  These implement HyperJumps within documents created by TeX, to other files in the local machine, or to the outside through the Internet.

The correspondences to <a href="..."> ... </a>, <a name="..."> ... </a> in HTML are implemented by HyperTeX specials:
\special{html:<a href="....">} ... \special{html:</a>}
\special{html:<a name="....">} ... \special{html:</a>}

The LaTeX style file (by Mr. Okumura) for this is shown below.
-------------------  myhyper.sty  --------------
\def\href{\leavevmode\begingroup \@sanitize \@href}
\def\@href#1{\special{html:<a href="#1">}\endgroup \@@href}
\def\@@href#1{#1\special{html:</a>}}

\def\base{\leavevmode\begingroup \@sanitize \@base}
\def\@base#1{\special{html:<base href="#1">}\endgroup}

\def\img{\leavevmode\begingroup \@sanitize \@img}
\def\@img#1{\special{html:<img src="#1">}\endgroup}

\def\name{\leavevmode\begingroup \@sanitize \@name}
\def\@name#1{\special{html:<a name="#1">}\endgroup \@@name}
\def\@@name#1{#1\special{html:</a>}}
-------------------------------------------
Since the "#" used in HTML has special meaning in TeX, the style file like the above is prepared.
Since only the last \name should only put a simple string in the argument, the following might be also acceptable.

\def\name#1#2{\leavevmode\special{html:<a name="#1">}#2\special{html:</a>}}

For the HyperTeX implementation, the only four macros above would be  enough.

Here are some examples:

dviout for Windows supports the HyperTeX specials of <a href=...>, <a name=...>, and </a>.

  Click   \href{#foo}{here}
  ......
  Jump to  \name{foo}{here}

  Obtain the latest version of dviout for Windows from
  \href{http://akagi.ms.u-tokyo.ac.jp/ftp-j.html#TeX}{here}

  dviout corresponds to
  moving to  \href{file:.\hypertex\hyper2.dvi#jump}{other dvi file}
  where is based on the directory containing the displayed document,
  displaying \href{file:\index.html}{HTML file}
  and accessing other resource, for example, \href{file:MyMovie.avi}{AVI file}

Remark 1.  To execute a local program with an extension .exe, .com, .cmd or .bat, one can give the parameters to the program by indicating them following to ^s.  For example,
\special{html:<a href="file:notepad.exe^sreadme.txt">} ... \special{html:</a>}

Remark 2.  dviout specials is supported in HyperTeX by
\special{html:<a href="dviout:macro">} ... \special{html:</a>}


[Common]
[Common] <- Property Sheets

Common setting for Loupe and source specials is in this sheet which is common in all modes.

The functions of Loupe are specified which appears when the right button of the mouse is pressed.  The setting here is [Save]d to the common position for the modes in Registry.

If you press the right mouse button with CTRL key, an another Loupe appears.   You can specify its setting in the area shown by the frame "Option(+CTRL)".

Size: specifies the length of one side of the loupe or the diameter of a round loupe in pixel (dot) units.

Scale: specifies the reduction ratio with the original dpi.  For example, if the original dpi is displayed by the gray scale compressed to one sixth and the Scale: is set to 2, the portion expanded by three times is displayed by the loupe.

Speed: Increase this number if the loupe afterimage remains and makes viewing difficult.  The lower the value would result in smoother motion.

Shape: selects the loupe shape -- square, measured square (1 unit = 4 pixel) or circle.  The square shape would work faster.

Back: specifies the background color.  Set default (=the color of the sheet) in general.  Setting the color to white when the display is not reversed or black when reversed, then the flickering while the loupe moves would be reduced.

Edge view: Loupe will not be hidden at the edge of the screen.

-src: specifies the way to execute the editor for source specials.

-gsrc: specifies the way to execute the graphic editor for the included graphic files.

-isp: specials which are ignored by dviout even if dviout cannot understand them.


[Graphic]
[Graphic] <- Property Sheets

-tpic: specifies whether to enable tpic specials, and when enabled, to use Bezier curves (default) or spline curves when drawing curves, whether to rotate coordinate in pTeX tate mode or not.

-GS: You can select the processing for PostScript specials or Image data files such as PS/EPS files, PBM files, BMP files.

-gbox: If you check this box, an outer frame of an imported image is displayed.  This option is enabled even if the image file import function is turned off by -GS:.

-gfit: specifies whether to use the reduced size of an intermediate color BMP file when handling a PostScript color image in a reduced display using the gray scale.

-gsize: specifies the size of the imported EPS/PS image by PostScript specials with/without magnification value when the specification of magnification for the dvi file is not 1000.

-GIF: selects the format of the image file generated using Ghostscript.  The default is raw PBM.  When this is set to BMP (256 colors), the file is treated as a color image.

The file name of the image data created from a PostScript file is one whose extension is changed to .pbm or .bmp.

-gdat: With this parameter, you can specify the directory having PBM or BMP files. The default is the Current Directory.

-gsx:  With this parameter, you can specify the path for Ghostscript program.  In most of the case, gswin32.exe might be on your path.

You can also specify some parameters for Ghostscript with -gsx:.
In this case, replace spaces with "^" as the delimiters to set, like following:

-gsx:c:\bin\gswin.exe^-dNOKANJI

-gow: If you check this box, the overlapped image data with other image data or characters is overwritten on them.

-gclip: If you check this box, the image data obtained from EPSF is clipped by its BoundindBox.

-spi: This parameter shows the directory where Susie plug-in exists.  Under Susie plug-in dviout can handle grahic files in various formats.

-color: enables coloring the characters or the lines by \special.

-cmode:  The mode (auto(p2), merge, replace, patch, patch2, auto(rep)) is set when the color assignments are superimposed by color specials.


tpic specials

tpic is based on the Troff figure preprocessor, pic, by Brian Kernighan and is the name of the TeX figure preprocessor written by Tim Morgan and the special command set output by it.  The LaTeX macros include eepic.  (For details, see the included documents.)

dviout supports the usual tpic specials commands (tpic 2.2).

pn, pa, fp, ip, da, dt, sp, ar, ia, sh, wh, bk

In addition to expanding the da command in dviout, the new rt and Bz commands are provided to expand original tpic specials(tpic specials extensions).

Note: Since dviout processes every page, when a page is skipped while displaying or Printing, the line width of the previous page is not generated and the default line width is used.  If you employ a line width other than the default in a series of pages, it would be better to insert pn command on each page or before a series of tpic specials.

Note: When printed on an LBP using a built-in driver, erasing by painting with white color under shading is not supported for built-in LBP Japanese fonts or downloaded fonts.

Note: In dviout, reading specials from a file is possible.  This is useful when revising complex tpic specials.


tpic specials commands

The origin of the position of each graphical element is the page position maintained by TeX.  The direction to the right is the positive direction of the X axis.  The downward direction is the positive direction of the Y axis.  The coordinates are represented by integers in milli-inch (0.254 mm) units.

An angle is measured in radian units clockwise from the positive direction of the X axis and has a value from 0 to "2 times pi".  By the command for drawing arcs, with setting the starting angle to zero and the final angle to "2 times pi" or more, a full circle or an ellipse can be drawn.

\special{pn s}%   The line width is set to s milli-inches.

\special{pa x y}% The point (x, y) is added to the path.

\special{fp}% The path defined previously is drawn with the current line width.  If shading is set and the path is closed, the interior of the path is painted.  The number of points in the path is reset to zero.

\special{ip}% This is similar to \special{fp}, but the path is not drawn.  If specified, there is shading.

\special{da f}% This is similar to \special{fp}, but the path is drawn with dashed line. f is a real number that specifies the length of each dash in inches (cf. tpic specials extensions).

\special{dt f}% This is similar to \special{fp}, but the path is drawn with a dotted line.  f is a real number that specifies the gap between dots in inches.

\special{sp d}% This is similar to \special{fp}, but the path is drawn with spline curves.  d is a real number that specifies the type of curve.
 - If d = 0 or is omitted, solid lines are drawn.
 - If d > 0, dashed lines are drawn.  d is the length of a dash.
 - If d < 0, dotted lines are drawn.  -d is the gap between each dot.

\special{ar x y u v s e}% draws an arc centered on (x, y).  s is the starting angle.  e is the final angle.  These real numbers are in radian units.
For a complete circle or ellipse, u and v represent the x and y radii, respectively.  Otherwise, u=v, and an arc is drawn from s to e.  If specified, there is shading.

\special{ia x y u v s e}% is similar to \special{ar x y u v s e}, but does not draw the arc.  If specified, there is shading.

\special{sh s}%specifies shading.  The interior of the closed figure (three or more pa's followed by fp or ip, or ar or ia) defined after this command is painted.
s is a real number between zero and one.  Zero means paint over in white.  Anything below the figure, including text, is complete erased.  A value other than zero means gray.  Anything below the figure is not erased but is painted gray.
The default is 0.5 and is gray.  One means black.  If s is not specified, the value 0.5 is used.  Only the interior of a figure is shaded.  The boundary lines are independent on this specification and have the current line width.

\special{wh}% Same as \special{sh 0}.
\special{bk}% Same as \special{sh 1}.


tpic specials extensions

The dviout tpic specials has the following extensions over the original tpic specials.  Be aware that since they are only supported by dviout, dvi files containing them have compatibility problems.

da command extension
To make it useful in drawing graphs with tools such as gnuplot, the da command is extended and takes multiple arguments.

The arguments alternately specify the lengths of the solid lines and the spaces in real numbers in units of inches.  Thus, a dashed line is drawn by repeating the specified pattern.  Each point in the path is passed through successively.  In other words, each point is not limited to being on a solid line portion.  For example,

\special{da 0.1}%     o___   ___    ___o___   ___
\special{da 0.1 0.1}% o___   ___   ___ o ___   ___
\special{da 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.01}          % one-point chain line
\special{da 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01}% two-point chain line

rt command extension
This command has several functions relating to rotation, enlargement, and inversion.  It takes variable number of parameters.

When used as rt p where p is an integer, the command has the following meanings:

 - If p = 1, it puts the current state of linear transformation on top of the stack.  If p is -1, it pops and returns the transformation from top of the stack, or returns the identity transformation when the stack is empty.  The stack can grow as deep as 16 levels.  The stack gets emptied at the start of each page.
 - If p is 2, included images are drawn without erasing whatever is currently on the canvas (-gow:-).  If p is 3, images are drawn after erasing the regions (-gow:+).  If p is 4, the graphics overwrite mode (-gow:) is restored to the one just before executing the previous rt 2 or rt 3.
 - rt 0 is the same as rt 0 0 0.

The command rt h v scales all subsequent text and graphic outputs horizontally by a factor of h and vertically by v around the current point.  The scaling factors may be negative.

All of the text and graphics output after rt x y f are only rotated by the angle f about (x, y).
As with other tpic commands, x and y are integers in units of milli-inches, and f is in positive radian units in the clockwise rotation.
The rotation is not relative, but is always with respect to the absolute coordinates of the bitmap.  Setting f=0 resets.
For example,

\begin{picture}(500,500)
\put(100,250){\special{rt 0 0 4.71239}\makebox(0,0){Leftside}%
\special{rt 0 0 0}}
\put(250,250){\special{rt 0 0 3.14159}\makebox(0,0){Upsidedown}%
\special{rt 0 0 0}}
\put(400,250){\special{rt 0 0 1.57080}\makebox(0,0){Rightside}%
\special{rt 0 0 0}}
\end{picture}

All the text and graphics output after the command rt h v w z  are linearly transformed around the current point by
(X,Y) -> (h*X + w*Y, z*X + v*Y)

The above transformations are similarly resumed by \special{rt 1 1}, \special{rt x y 0} or \special{rt 1 1 0 0}.

The transformation changes into the composition with the transformation at the top of the stack (which is the identity if there exist nothing there). This implies that the transformation is replaced by the defined one if the stack is empty. For example,

\special{rt 0 0 -.5236}%
\special{rt 1}%
\special{rt 1 2}%
text
\special{rt -1}%
\special{rt -1}%

means that the string "text" is scaled by 2 only vertically and then the result is rotated by the angle of 15 degree in the counter clockwise direction.

Bz command extension
This command switches from a spline curve to a Bezier curve or the reverse for drawing curves with the sp command.

The \special{sp} after \special{Bz 1} switches to Bezier.
The \special{sp} after \special{Bz 0} switches to spline.

The default is to use spline curves.  The -tpic=1 option can switch to Bezier curves.


reading specials from a file

tpic specials or any number of consecutive \special can be written to a file and read.  The TeX format is

\special{file=file_name}

\special is written in file_name.

The search path for the file is identical to the one for a BMP file so the Current Directory and the directory indicated by -gdat: are searched.

If  % appears in the file, everything until the 0x0a newline code is ignored.

Only the parts enclosed by {...} in \special{...} in the file are interpreted.  Other parts are ignored.

Even if there is { } nesting in this {...}, the processing is correct.  In addition, all of the character codes below 0x20 in {...} are replaced by spaces.

One {...} is allowed to contain a maximum of 4000 bytes.


Image data file
dviout can read image data files in the PS/EPS, WMF/EMF, raw PBM, BMP/BMC (monochrome, 16 colors, 256 colors, 65,535 colors, full color) formats and many other formats.
dviout can also handle the gzipped files transformed from the original image data files.
One can use Embedding into DVI file or the files must be placed in either the directory containing the dvi file or the directory specified by -gdat:.

See "Image data file specials".

For viewing these Image data files, checks the item Ghostscript under "Property Sheets->[Graphic]" as On (-GS:).

If you want to handle PostScript files, you need Ghostscript which supports the raw PBM output specified by -GIF: or the BMP output (corresponding to multiple colors).  Then, specify the full path name in -gsx: (or press the button to open the executable file).

To read an image data file whose format is different from PS/EPS, WMF/EMF, raw PBM and BMP/BMC, the corresponding Susie plug-in (cf. -spi:) is required.


Image data file specials

dviout can read Image data files in the PS/EPS, raw PBM, and monochrome and color BMP/BMC formats.  Using Susie plug-in(cf. spi:), dviout can read other formats(PNG/JPEG/TIFF/PCD/PPM etc).  The images can also be printed by Including printer control codes into TeX file.

For an encapsulated PostScript file (EPSF), Ghostscript can be used to import images.  The \specials supported by dviout are

epsfile=epsf_file [parameters]

which is used by (ecl)spsf.sty or epsfig.sty, or
PSfile=epsf_file [parameters]

which is used to output graphicx.sty in the LaTex2e graphics package to dvips.
epsf_file is the name of the EPS file.  The name can be enclosed by double quotes ("") as in "foo.ps" or not as in foo.ps.  Of course, these specifications can be directly written in the TeX text as \special{...}.

In addition,

postscriptbox{widthpt}{heightpt}{epsf_file}

that is output by epsbox.sty is also supported. PSfrag can also be used.

For information about [parameters], see "PostScript special parameters" or "Examples using PostScript specials".

The following \specials are supported respectively for PostScript files not containing %%BoundingBox:, raw PBM files (can omit the .pbm extension), Windows Metafiles/monochrome or color BMP files (can omit the .bmp extension)/files handled by Susie plug-in:

psfile=ps_file [parameters]
pbmfile=pbm_file [parameters]
bmpfile=graphic_file [parameters]

(The raw PBM style file called pbmf.sty is provided with dviout.)  [parameters] can be hsize, vsize, height, width, hscale, vscale, scale, truesize and reverse (cf. PostScript special parameters).

ps: PS code

or

" PS code

can be processed (in the latter, one space is required after the double quote ") if PS code is a complete PostScript code to draw a picture.

The following are also supported to include a graphic file which is not a PostScript file.  The former is used by emTeX and MikTeX+yap and the latter by dvipdfm.

em: graph graphic_file[,width[,height]]

pdf: image width widthpt height heightpt(graphic_file)

When the graphicx.sty of the LaTeX2e graphics package is used in dvips output, all the key words in the package can be handled with the following limitations.

1. The image written by PostScript can be rotated by the angle of interger multiple of 90 degree.  The rotations by other angle is not supported.  The rotations of the image in EMF/WMF and the colored image in any other file format are not supported, neither.

2. Scalings of colored images not written in the PostScript are ignored.

3. The last parameter of \DeclareGraphicRules should not be a command.

4. \pagecolor is only valid in the page where is is declared.

5. dviout makes files in BMC format to handle Postscript files but BMC files can be handled by dviout as if they are BMP files.  When BMP files are requested, dviout first searches the corresponding BMC files and uses them if they exist.

6. The location of the image data file can be indicated by the relative path from the location of the DVI file.  In this case, the character / can be used as a separator of the directory names.

7. The file name of a gzipped image data file should be added .gz at the tail ot the original one and the program gzip should be executed by the command gzip -d <file>.gz or gunzip <file>.gz.

The following are examples.

\includegraphics[<key val list>]{file}
\includegraphics*[<key val list>]{file}
\rotatebox[<key val list>]{angle}{text}
\scalebox{<h scale>}[<v scale>]{text}
\textcolor{<name>}{text}


PostScript special parameters

hsize=width vsize=height : These represent the width and height of the imported image, respectively.  %%BoundingBox: in the EPS is read and the scale is changed to the specified size (if only hsize or vsize was specified, the vertical-to-horizontal ratio is kept).
If the width and height represent lengths and units (possibly, cm, inch, or mm) are not given, they are interpreted as point values (72 pt = 1 inch) in PostScript.

The above hsize=, vsize= may be replaced by width=, height=, respectively.

hscale=w vscale=h : The horizontal and vertical scale conversion factors are specified in real numbers.  If only one is specified, a similarity transformation is performed.

scale=s : The similarity transformation is done s times.

llx=x1 lly=y1 urx=x2 ury=y2 : These have the same meaning as the %%BoundingBox: specification and indicate a rectangular image slice where (x1,y1) and (x2,y2) are the vertices of a diagonal.  The unit is the PostScript pt and is the value before scale conversion.

rwi=ww rhi=hh : Although they have the same meanings as the hsize= and vsize= specifications (only one can be specified), the values of ww and hh are 10 times the pt in PostScript.

hoffset=h_off v_offset=v_off : The positions when taken from an EPS file are shifted in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Similar to width, h_off and v_off are given as lengths.

truesize : The size is not affected by the magnification in the dvi file or by -mag:, -e:, etc.

truedirection : The figure is included in the same direction as the original under the vertical mode of pTeX.  If this is not indicated, the figure is circulated by 90 degree in clockwise under the mode, which is the case using the graphics package of LaTeX2e.

clip : When taken from EPS, the image protruding into the border is cut off.  By default, the border is 1 inch wide.

reverse : Black and white reversal (This is ignored if the image is handled as color.)


Examples using PostScript specials
- when using graphicx.sty in the LaTeX2e graphics package
\usepackage{graphicx, color}
\includegraphics*[width=8cm, height=12cm, keepaspectratio]{golfer.ps}
\includegraphics[bb=0 0 2in 2in]{figure.bmp}
\includegraphics[width=5cm,height=4cm]{images/figure.bmp.gz}
\rotatebox[origine=c]{180}{...Like This...}
{\color{red}This is red.}
In this case, the three added files of dviout.def, graphics.cfg and color.cfg, or graphics.cfg and color.cfg containing only the line shown below are placed in the same directory as the graphics package.
\ExecuteOption{dvips}
If texmf\tex\latex\config exists, graphics.cfg and color.cfg should be put there.

- when using graphics.sty in place of graphicx.sty, then
\includegraphics[8cm,6cm]{figer.bmp}
In this case options such as keepaspectratio cannot be specified.

- when using Susie plug-in to handle graphic files in other formats or handling Windows Metafiles, then, for example, {figer.bmp} in the above is replaced by {figer.jpg}, {figer.png} or {figure.wmf}. In this case, the attached dviout.def should be used.

- when using LaTeX2.09 with epsf.sty
\documentstyle[epsf]{article}
\begin{center}
  \leavevmode
  \epsfsize=87mm
  \epsfbox{golfer.ps}
\end{center}

- examples of using special commands
\special{epsfile=golfer.ps hsize=5.2cm vsize=7.5cm}
\vspace{9cm}
\special{pbmfle=tiger vsize=5cm}
\vspace{6cm}
\special{epsfile=golfer.ps scale=0.5}


-GS: specifies the processing of the \special related to importing an Image data file.(For details, see "Property Sheets->[Graphic]")


Ghostscript
This program is needed for dviout to interpret PostScript code.  At this writing,

  gswin32.exe/gswin32c.exe   Ver.5.50

for Windows 95 can be patched to use Windows 95 TrueType Japanese fonts.  Note that this program does not support monochrome GIF format (cf. Q_E4).


BMP file
A BMP file is the standard image file supported by MS Windows.  (dviout can read them in as Image data files and save the displayed view as a BMP file.)

In dviout, each page is expanded into a BMP file for displaying or Printing.  The data in a color image file are composed when displaying or printing.  The common uses are

 - Monochrome (black-and-white) BMP file that is not enlarged or reduced, or is printed
 - 16-color BMP file for a gray scale display
 - 256-color BMP file for searching or when colored by HyperTeX

In addition, an uncompressed BMP file of 65,535 colors or 16.77 million colors can be read.

Example  In one A4 page, the standards for the BMP file sizes for dpi = 300 are as follows.

1:1 monochrome BMP:                                  about 1 Mbyte
1:1 256-color BMP:                                       about 8 Mbytes
1:1 full color BMP:                                        about 24 Mbytes
16-level gray scale BMP compressed by 1/4 (75 dpi):  about 256 kbytes
256-color BMP compressed by 1/4 (75 dpi):      about 500 kbytes


BMC
BMC is an original format of graphic files which is a simple compression of uncompressed BMP files.  This format is used to compress the size of graphic files and read and write them quickly (see the document in the package of dviout).

BMC format is equally used by dviout in place of BMP format.  bmc.exe in the package of dviout can transform one of the formats to the other.


Current Directory
dviout for Windows sets the drive and directory where the currently  displayed dvi file exists to the current drive and the current directory.

However, this is not the case if the dvi file is on the network or the dvi file is not displayed.

The current directory becomes the first search path for the image file imported by specials.


[Printer]
[Printer] <- Property Sheets

On this sheet, you can set the characteristic properties for the printer or its driver.

The adjustments are saved in the Registry by [Save] and are applied to the current session by [Apply].
When the values saved in the [REGISTRY] become the defaults at start-up, all of the corresponding options are checked by [Auto Load] in the [REGISTRY] sheet and [Save]d on the [REGISTRY] sheet.  (By default, all of the saved options are loaded as the defaults at start-up.)

 -area:(Use default area for system driver)   When a Windows printer driver is used, this driver's defaults are used and the following settings for the widths of the unprintable areas are ignored.

 -LM:  Width of the unprintable area on the left side of the paper

 -TM:  Width of the unprintable area at the top of the paper

The origin in a TeX dvi file is located one inch to the right from the left end of the paper and one inch from the top.  Usually, the printer cannot print from the top left edge of the page.  If these unprintable areas are not corrected, the origin on pages might be offset to right downward.

If the Windows defaults is not proper, remove the check for -area:, then adjust -LM: and -TM:.  The dvi file for printing position adjustment is provided with dviout.   The origin of this dvi file should be correctly positioned (cf. Adjusting the Print Position).
If these values are increased, the printing position on the paper is shifted to left or upward. (These parameters are used to correct the position difference between in Printing and in Preview.)

Note:  If a built-in dviout driver is used, the -LM: and -TM: settings are always enabled.

Note:  If you want to temporarily shift the printing position, use -OX: and -OY: and not -LM: and -TM:.

 -RM:  Width of the unprintable area on the right side of the paper

 -BM:  Width of the unprintable area at the bottom of the paper

Note 1:  Since -RM: and -BM: are processed in Windows 95 (by the printer driver), usually they do not have to be set.  These values do not affect the printing positions.

Note 2:  If landscape is selected by [Paper], since the images rotated 90 degrees clockwise are printed, the TeX dvi origin is adjusted by -TM: and -RM:.
(When returning to the correct orientation (rotating the paper 90 degrees counterclockwise, specifically placing the TeX dvi origin at the top left), increasing -TM:, moves the origin to left, while increasing -RM:, moves the origin up.)
Only when the built-in dviout LIPS III/IV and ESC/Page drivers are employed, the position is adjusted by -LM: and -TM: with landscape being the same as portrait.

--- Printing without Windows printer drivers (-dviprt: setting) ---

dviprt is default:  The default is to follow the -dviprt: setting and not use the Windows printer driver in the printing dialog (corresponding to a checked dviprt in the printing dialog).

follow default dpi:  When the specified built-in dviout printer driver is used, the default dpi of the built-in driver is used and not the dpi set by dviout.

[CFG file]: This button specifies the configuration file when printing uses an external printer configuration file in the built-in dviout printer driver.

-dviprt: This specifies the process and the parameters when the console dviprt or dvips etc.is called to print or the built-in dviout driver is used (This is the case when Windows printer drivers are not used for printing).


[System]
[System] <- Property Sheets

-br: specifies the size of the cache buffer that saves the bitmap data of each character.

-bf: specifies the buffer size for the cache for font files, such as the PK font.  At least the same size as the maximum size of the PK font is required.

-bb: specifies the maximum allowable size of the buffer for expanding the image of a page.  Since the required size must be allocated, a sufficiently large buffer size should be specified.
(When dpi=300 for the A4 size, the required buffer is of about 1 Mbytes.  If the dpi is doubled, a buffer that is four times larger, around 4 Mbytes, is required.)

-multi: specifies how many dviout's can run at the same time.

-log: specifies the path name of the log file recording information such as dviout errors or warnings.  If only + is specified, the log file is created with the name dviout.log in the directory containing dviout.exe.  If - is set, the log file is not created.  This setting can be changed from the Menu Bar.

-texhelp: specifies the DVI file and parameters which is shown by Help -> TeX Help.

-renew:  When you are using dviout, you might visit other window from the dviout window and then return again to that dviout window.  If this parameter is checked,  dviout will check whether the displayed dvi file has been modified or not, and if modified, the display will be updated automatically.

-button:  The tool button setting, such as "Backward/Forward history," is changed to the default.

-base:  The base line of each character is displayed.  This is used for checking while proofreading.

-box:  Instead of each character, a box whose size is of the character is displayed.  This is used for proofreading.

-Wshow:  A child window is opened in the case of Automatic Font Generation or execution of Ghostscript.

Reverse page_up/down  This switches the direction of incrementing or decrementing of page number when press the arrow for page jump in the tool bar.  (This is applied by ([OK] and [Apply] and enabled the next time.  This specification is common with all modes in Registory.)

-file: specifies the Parameter file.


Property Sheets->[System]->Reverse page_up/down

The incrementing or decrementing of Page Number when pressing the arrows for page jumps of the tool bar are reversed.  (This is applied by [OK] and [Apply] and enabled the next time.  There is no distinction by mode.)


[Paper]
[Paper] <- Property Sheets

Paper size: This sets the page size of the paper.  When "Defined by User" is selected, the vertical and horizontal sizes are specified.
dviout creates the BMP file of the image of each page based on this size.

Orientation: Sets whether the paper is set to portrait (default vertical orientation) or landscape (horizontal orientation).

Note: The Paper size: and Orientation: settings are independently set in the printer and its driver in the printing dialog.  Usually, the same settings must be made when actually printing.

-OX: Setting of the correction of the output position in the horizontal direction
-OY: Setting of the correction of the output position in the vertical direction

Note: In the dvi file, the top left corner of the paper is the reference and the origin is positioned at (1 inch, 1 inch) = (25.4mm, 25.4mm).
(If -LM: and -TM: have valid settings)  Normally, this origin is printed to be located at (1 inch, 1 inch) on the actual paper.  However, if the origin is shifted for some reason, set the -OX: and -OY: options.

-HC: The text width read from the dvi file is considered to be the horizontal width of the document.  Based on the horizontal width of the paper that is set, this option can specify the centering in the horizontal direction of the document.
-VC: The height of the text read from the dvi file is considered to be the vertical width of the document.  Based on the vertical width of the paper that is set, this option can specify the centering in the vertical direction of the document.
-HS: When centering in the horizontal direction is set, this option can define the shift in the horizontal direction after centering.
-VS: When centering in the vertical direction is set, this option can define the shift in the vertical direction after centering.

f8-edge: Indicate the spaces along the edges under Presentation Menu->Cut edge.

Note: The text size written in a dvi file might be not relevant to the actual paper size.  Usually, it would be better to uncheck options like -HC: and -VC:.


[REGISTRY]
[REGISTRY] <- Property Sheets

This sheet specifies which parameter is read or not read from the Registry when start-up. (cf. Parameters.)

When this sheet is selected first in the property sheets, the parameters marked with + in the list box are automatically read in mode at present.  (In default, all the parameters is read automatically when start-up.)

[Auto Load]  Adds + mark to the selected parameter in the list box in [REGISTRY]. Marked parameters will be read from Registory when start-up.

[Ignore]  Removes + mark from the selected parameter in the list box. Unmarked parameters will not be read from Registory when start-up.

[All Set] in [REGISTRY]  Adds + to all the parameters in the list box.

[All Clear] in [REGISTRY]  Removes + from all the parameters in the list box.

Note: The automatic reading of the parameters set here become effective after the [Save] button on this sheet is pressed.  Pressing the [Restore] button on this sheet shows the list of parameters to be read automatically with +.

[Save] in [REGISTRY]  The settings are saved at the locations for the current mode of the Registry.  The values of the parameters marked by + are automatically read when the start-up mode is the current mode.

[Restore] in [REGISTRY]  The list of parameters to be read at start-up is obtained based on the current mode of the Registry and indicated with + set to the parameters displayed in the list box.
When the current setting is changed, the current settings are first obtained by this button.  They can be corrected and saved.

Note: The [Apply] and [OK] buttons are unrelated to the settings in the [REGISTRY] sheet.

--------  Selected mode   ----------
Default mode: specifies the start-up mode.  The parameters specified for automatic reading for this mode are read in from the Registry at start-up.  (The settings become effective after the [Save] button is pressed.)

Current mode: changes the current mode.  This is reflected to the current dviout (you don't need to press the [Apply] or [OK] button.).
[Save] and [Restore] to the Registry of the various parameter values on each page of the property sheets are applied to the current mode in the Registry.

 Current Print:  When dviout is in the current mode set above, the mode can change to the mode set here only when Printing.  (This becomes effective after the [Save] button is pressed.)
For example, you might want to employ different dpi when printing from when previewing (cf. Q_P6) or invoke Ghostscript to interpret PostScript \specials only when printing.
By specifying a mode in Current Print, such a temporal switching of mode is possible.  However, when invoking an external application program such as dviprt, this setting is ignored.

Current Name:  You can give a name to the current mode and this  would make it easy to remember which mode has which specification.  The name is displayed in the dialog for changing the mode by "Option -> Mode".


Registry
The Registry is supported by Win32 to save information about each type of parameter in the Win32 system or program.  This information is actually recorded in a format such as a database on the disk.

dviout saves the information in HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\SHIMA\dviout in the Registry.  Many parameters are saved at 10 different locations for each mode. They correspond to the locations of para0,..., para9 under ...\SHIMA\dviout.

para0,...,para9 :  Each parameter of mode0,..., mode9 is stored by the key of the parameter name and its value (as integer or character type data).

FILE :  This is the history of file names employed by dviout.  There are 16 keys, from 0 to 15.  The oldest one is 0.
In Font key, packed data of frequently used fonts and their font files on the hard disk is stored.
In Freq key, information which has frequency of usage of each font is stored.  First 1 byte represents version number, the next 1 byte denotes how many times the Font key is not renewed, the next 2 bytes stores size of Font key value, and last 2 bytes shows data number.

FIND :  This is the history of the strings employed in
String Searches.  They are 0, 1, 2..., where 0 is first.

KeyTable :  The definitions of the key functions are stored in the binary format.

Settings :  The size or position of the dviout window and loupe properties are stored.


Selected mode
Specify the mode at start-up, the current mode, and the mode for Printing.  You can give a name to the current mode.

For details, see Property Sheets->[REGISTRY].


Current Name:
You can give a name to the current mode and this  would make it easy to remember which mode has which specification.  The name is displayed in the dialog for changing the mode by "Option -> Mode".


Current mode:
The current mode is changed in the [REGISTRY] of Property Sheets. This is immediately reflected to the current dviout.  (The settings of the Parameters are not read.)

[Save] and [Restore] to the Registry of the values of the parameters on each page of the property sheets are performed for the Registry in this mode.


Default mode:
Default mode: specifies the start-up mode.  The parameters specified for automatic reading for this mode are read in from the Registry when start-up.  (The settings become effective after the [Save] button is pressed.)

In the command line, if the parameter -mode: is specified such as

dviout -mode=2

then the mode is changed to the specified mode above after initialization in  the default mode.


Current Print:
When dviout is in the current mode, the mode can change to the mode set here only when Printing.  (This becomes effective after the [Save] button is pressed.)

For example, you might want to employ different dpi when printing from when previewing (cf. Q_P6) or invoke Ghostscript to interpret PostScript \specials only when printing.  By specifying a mode in Current Print, such a temporal switching of mode is possible.


[Auto Load]
Adds + mark to the selected parameter in the list box in [REGISTRY]. Marked parameters will be read from Registory when start-up.


[Ignore]
Removes + mark from the selected parameter in the list box of the [REGISTRY] of Property Sheets. Unmarked parameters will not be read from Registory when start-up.


[Save] in [REGISTRY]
The settings in the [REGISTRY] of Property Sheets are saved at the locations for the current mode of the Registry.  The values of the parameters marked by + are automatically read when the start-up mode is the current mode.


[Restore] in [REGISTRY]
The list of parameters to be read at start-up is obtained based on the current mode of the Registry and indicated with + set to the parameters displayed in the list box.

When the current setting is changed, the current settings are first obtained by this button.  They can be corrected and saved.


[All Set] in [REGISTRY]
Adds + to all the parameters in the list box in [REGISTRY] of Property Sheets.


[All Clear] in [REGISTRY]
Removes + from all the parameters in the list box of the [REGISTRY] of Property Sheets.


list box in [REGISTRY]
The parameters marked with + in the parameter list of the [REGISTRY] list box are set to the default values when start-up (by pressing the [Save] in [REGISTRY] sheet ).

 - The current setting states are obtained by [Restore] in [REGISTRY].
 - Setting or clearing + is performed by [All Clear] in [REGISTRY], [All Set] in [REGISTRY], [Ignore], and [Auto Load].
 -  The mode at start-up is set by Selected mode.


 - Preview (Q_V)

 - Font (Q_F)

 - Print (Q_P)

 - Parameter (Q_S)

 - Image data (Q_G)

 - Error message (Q_E)

 - Operations on Windows95/98/NT (Q_W)

 - Other problems (Q_T)

 - Other questions (Q_O)


 - Slow display of the first page (Q_V1).
 - Slow page move (Q_V2).
 - I want to reverse the direction of the page motion by the arrow of the tool bar (Rev_arrow).
 - I want to change into Landscape style by a toolbar button (Q_V10).
 - Too large or too small display scale (Q_V3).
 - Blurred or faint characters in the preview view (Q_V4).
 - I want to guarantee a preview view that is as large as possible (Q_V5).
 - Check for the update of the dvi file and update the preview automatically (Q_V6).
 - An afterimage remains when the Loupe moves or flickeres (Q_V7).
 - The display background is too bright (-bright:).
 - Landscape pages are displayed in portrait (Q_O22).
 - When magnified, the string found by the "Search" (-sdpi:) cannot be highlighted.
 - The colors of the strings found by the "String Search" are unclear or do not change. (Q_V8).
 - Strings copied to the clipboard including symbols are strange (-sFont:).
 - Faint colors appear on the outlines of colored characters and the positions are offset (Q_V9).
 - Preview window flickers by scrolling (Q_V15).
 - I want to view the whole page (Q_V11).
 - Using mouse buttons for preview (Q_V12).
 - How to know a position or a length in the preview window (Q_V13).
 - How to prepare a dvi file for Presentation(Q_V14)


When dviout starts up, dviout determines which font file on the disk should be used for all of the fonts used by the dvi file (reads -TEXPK:, etc.) if font search on demand (-Fod:) is OFF and creates the position mapping between the page and the dvi file.
A larger dvi file will take longer time to display the first page. If the display of the first page is extraordinary slower than page moves or jump, this might be due to too much time for font searching by dviout..

(To validitate the record of the location of fonts) eXit+Save (not Quit) dviout and execute dviout again and choose the last dvi file.  Then check the time to display the first page in this way.

Font search will take a long time when // or \\ is specified in -TEXPK: invoking kpathsea with -Fkeep: OFF.  It is better not to use // nor \\ for close to the root directory.

By default, all of the Parameters saved in the Registry are loaded at the start-up.  By changing the settings in [REGISTRY] property sheet to load only the necessary ones might be good for quick start-up.


There are some cases when Move between pages is slow, particularly for page 1 -> page 2 -> page 1, the final page 2 -> page 1 is also slow.

The reason for this might be due to a long time to expand a page by dviout.  When a high-resolution font is used, the process data becomes large, and it takes time.  Even for a gray scale display, a 400 dpi or smaller font would be better.  For a particularly slow PC, use a 118 dpi font instead of using gray scale.

Also the move between page is slow when the font cache buffer is too small because of frequent flushing.  See "Help -> Buffer info" (Buffer Information). The size of this buffer is defined by -bf:.


The magnification and reduction scales of the display can be changed by "Display -> Magnify or Reduce," or by H-scale and V-scale in "Property Sheets -> [Display]".

When [Save] is pressed in [Display], the current state becomes the default.  (Based on the case, checking and [Save] are required in [REGISTRY].)


This is because of the gray scale display.  In "Property Sheet -> [Display]", adjust the contrast.  When "High", the character becomes darker.


View -> Tool Bar, Status Bar, Page Slider, or Scroll Bar can erase the tool bar, status bar, page slider, or scroll bar.
Therefore, preview view portion becomes somewhat wide for the dviout window.

One may use Presentation Mode to display with no frame.
One may also use Presentation Menu->Cut edge.

Specifying the parameter -NULL: in the command line, the whole display of CRT is used for Preview (cf. Start and Exit).


If the dvi file is updated when the TeX source file is created or corrected while previewing, the preview view can be automatically updated (-renew:).
This update is checked only when the main dviout window is changed into active.


In a model that is slow to rewrite the screen, you may worry about the status.  In particular, when the loupe is round or color image data is included, rewriting becomes slow.
If the loupe is square and the background is default, and moreover if Scale: equals 1 and the value of Speed:  is increased, the status improves (Property Sheets -> [Common]).


The string searched is displayed in red by default.  In a gray scale display, strings are displayed with 16 red intensity levels.  However, in a Windows screen with 256-color mode or lower modes, the colors cannot be accurately represented.

The measures against this are setting the screen to "High color" or "Full color", changing the color assignment to the box shape (Property Sheets->[Search]), or changing the gray scale.

If characters already colored by color specials are found, the colors are not changed.  This can be indicated by underlines, boxes, or cursor movements.


When -color: is set to "ON", a \special can assign colors to characters and lines.

Antialiasing is used instead of the gray scale when compressing, but faint colors occur on the outlines by the painting over by REPLACE (cf. -cmode:).

Since the characters are displayed after antialiasing each character, the position is offset by a maximum of one dot.

For a 1:1 display by the loupe, the appearance can be normal.


The six buttons on the right-hand column of the Second Tool Buttons (left/right arrows, smiley face, etc; cf. View->View Menu) can be freely redefined with Property Sheet->[Key].

For example, to define the lefthand arrow button the function to change into/from Landscape style, choose Option->Setup Parameters->[Key], and set Function: to  Landscape, Key: to User2, then press [Define].  Continue with other definitions if necessary.  Then press [Save] and lastly [OK].  The toolchips will be changed appropriately.

If these buttons are not displayed, toggle View->Change Tool Buttons.


To display the whole page, do one of the following:

 - Use Display->Fit on the toolbar (the default key is set to 5).
 - Set appropriate scale with Display->View4, say (the default key is 4)
 - Set appropriate scale to the Loupe option (Ctrl + right-click on the mouse).
 - Use Display->View->two pages, cross pages etc.


Here's a summary of functions of the mouse buttons while Previewing.

1. Click on the left button stands for a HyperTeX jump.  If the Ctrl key is pressed while clicking, the jump location is displayed, prompting the user for the confirmation.

2. When the mouse pointer is shaped of hand and is placed on a position which is not a HyperTeX hotspot, move the mouse while pressing the left button to scroll the page.

3. Click the left button while pressing SHIFT key to acquire the character string under the mouse pointer for copying to clipboard.  If source specials are set, it is possible to jump to the TeX source file.

4. Click the left button under Pressing CTRL and SHIFT keys to get the information of the pointed character and the positions in a page and the DIV file.

5. The right button is for the Loupe function.  Use Ctrl key for another Loupe.  Move the mouse while pressing the right button to move the Loupe.

6. The double click of the left button results the jump to the source file of the TeX according to the source specials if the shape of the cursor is an arrow.

7. Turn the central wheel of IntelliMouse to scrollup/down.
Press the wheel or Shift key at the same time to Move to another page. If the left mouse button is pressed with the wheel, the jump is to the top ot the nest page or the bottom of the former page.
If SHIFT key or CTRL key is pressed in this page jump, long jump by 5 or 10 pages is done at a time.
Press the Ctrl key to magnify/reduce the screen.
The side buttons of IntelliMouse Explorer correspond to Backward History and Forward Hsitory.

8. In displaying 4 or 16 pages in a reduced size(Display->View->two pages, cross pages), the pointed page is displayed in a normal size by clicking the right button of the mouse.

9. Using cover sheet under Presentation Mode, the cover sheet is moved by the mouse. Under Presentation Mode the operations 3 and  have different meanings (cf. Key on Presentation).

10. Click the right button under pressing CTRL key and the left button to jump to the source file under the setting of source specials.

10. In the case of indicating the region by Display->Region, the corners of the rectangular region are pointed by clicking the left/right buttons of the mouse while SHIFT key is pressed.


Click the left mouse button while pressing CTRL and SHIFT keys.  Then the position pointed the mouse pointer is shown.

By the loupe with a measure([Common]), one can measure the length by the unit of 4 pixel.

To get the real length from the pixel, see Help->Other Info->Screen/File Info (Information related to files and views).


1. Using an existing dvi file
Suppose that a page is of A4 size and is displayed by scrolling only vertically with the maximal width in the screen:

 - Shift the position and size of a page to cut space in the sides of a page.  For example, under Help -> Setup Parameters -> [Paper], set

-OX=-2.25cm
-OY=-2.50cm
-y=F15.80cm:21.80cmP

Save these as a mode in [REGISTRY] if necessary.
This adjustment can be automatically done by Presentation Menu->Cut edge or selcet Display -> Region -> On, define region by [Shift]+Mouse and Display -> Region -> Cut.

 - Change the settings View -> Cover sheet, Seamless HyperJump, Presentation type,  Cover type if necessary.

 - To use the seamless vertical scroll, select Display -> Y-two pages (this is done by [0] key in default).

 - After moving to Presentation Mode by [ESC], display a page under Full mode (this is done by [6] key in default).

 - The function to display 4 or 16 pages at a time ([8], [9] key in default setting) may be usuful.  Then by the clicking one of the pages by the right button on the mouse, the pointed page will be displayed.

2. Making a dvi file for Presentation
Suppose that \documentclass{slides} is chosen at the head of the LaTeX2e source file and that a page is totally displayed without a scroll.

 - Define the size of the page(\paperheight, \paperwidth) under consideration of the resolution of fonts and the screen.  In particuler, the ratio of the horizontal size and the vertical size of a page should be equal to that of the screen.
Arrange the values of \hoffet, \voffet, \textwidth, \textheight.

 - Write the TeX source by using dviout specials and pause special so that Presentation will proceed in Fit mode ([5] key under the default setting) only by pushing [Space] key.


Under some Windows system or some environment the preview window flickers by the scrolling.

Setting the background color to be the same color (usually white) of the sheet of the page by View -> Background, it may be improved.


 - Font Metric File and Font Glyph File
 - Automatic font location setting ([Guess])
 - Size adjustment of the Japanese font (Q_F1).
 - Adjustments of the base line positions of the European language fonts and Japanese fonts(Q_F2).
 - What is the precedence of the Japanese fonts? (Q_F11)
 - Using slanted, flat, and long fonts.(Q_F3)
 - Display the information of the font used (Q_F13).
 - Uses the color characters color specials.
 - The font with a long name such as lcircle10 or lcirclew10 is not found (Q_F4).
 - The Automatic Font Generation of a nonexistent European language font (Q_F6).
 - Handling Nonexistent Fonts.
 - Use Times New Roman or non-default TrueType Japanese fonts (Q_F14)
 - Embed fonts into DVI file
 - Employing Windows Japanese fonts for NTTJTeX dvi files(Q_O3).
 - The Windows TrueType Japanese font settings were erased (Q_F9).
 - Want to use TrueType Japanese fonts with fonts in a format of "the Shotai-Club"(Q_F10).
 - Will TrueType Japanese fonts be used in the Windows that is not the Japanese version? (Q_F12)
 - The European language TrueType display looks odd (Q_F5).
 - High-resolution, large fonts will be used (Q_F8).
 - I want to use rotated strings (Q_F7).


- The sizes of the Japanese fonts are adjusted together with -S:.
- Individual adjustments to Windows TrueType Japanese fonts are done by H scale/V scale in [WinJFont].
- Subparameter s of -dviprt: for LBP Driver is used to change the sizes of Japanes fonts genereted by LBP.


-J: is used to adjust the base line position of a Japanese font.  For horizontal writing, this is used to shift the Japanese text up or down.

For TrueType fonts using WinAPI, each font can be adjusted by V position and H position of "Property Sheets->[WinJFont]".


For Windows TrueType fonts, the settings can be made by [WinJFont].  If the size or the horizontal and vertical positions are not adjusted in major changes, the balance with other characters may worsen.  These settings can be made by [WinJFont], but there is no automatic adjustment of the vertical-to-horizontal ratio of the characters matching jfm/tfm.

When a built-in LBP Japanese font is used in Printing, the length and flatness can be specified by the -dviprt: parameters.  The length and flatness matching jfm can be automatically adjusted.

In the package exjfont.zip, there exist jfm files of flat and long mincho fonts and the parameter file to set [WinJFont].

Using graphics package of LaTeX2e, one can deform characters by the command \scalebox.


Because of the length restrictions on file names in MS-DOS, one technique truncates a font name longer than eight characters, such as lcircle10 and lcirclew10, to eight characters.  This uses names like lcircle1.pk and lcirclew.pk for PK font files and lcircle1.tfm and lcirclew.tfm for Font Metric Files.
(Another technique cuts out the middle as with lcirle10 and lcirew10.)

Note: This writes lcircle10 and lcirclew10 in the dvi file only for the file names of fonts and is no different than a dvi file created on UNIX for example.

Since long file names can be used in Windows 95 and NT, the correct, the full names can be used.
The font files and various utilities provided by MS-DOS are usually truncated to eight characters.  Therefore, caution is necessary if they will also be used.(Change to a correct font file name or use -L: or -F:.)


Don't use the old way indicating European Language TrueType Fonts in -TEXPK:. Specify the correspondence of TeX fonts and TrueType fonts in Property sheets->[WinJFont] and the place of the corresponding tfm files in -TEXPK:.

If some characters are replaced by wrong ones, please use Virtual fonts (cf.-ftt:).


If you have mktexpk.exe, makepk.exe or MakeTeXPK.exe, you can employ Automatic Font Generation for European language fonts by using a file template.pks provided with dviout. Specifically,

1. Pass the path to mktexpk.exe or MakeTeXPK.exe.

2. Make sure that mktexpk, makepk or MakeTeXPK works correctly by executing in a command line.
If the location of the fonts created by mktexpk.exe or MakeTeXPK (for example, c:\usr\local\share\texmf\fonts\pk\^s.^dpk) is not included in -TEXPK:, add it.

3.  If the printer in "mode_name=" of template.pks is different from yours, you should change this option.  If you use mktexpk.exe, you should replace MakeTeXPK in template.pks by mktexpk.

4. template.pks is set in -gen: in "Option -> Setup Parameters -> Font2" by its full path name.  For example, set

-gen:c:\dviout\utility\template.pks

and press the [Save] and [Apply] buttons.

The direct specification can also be made by the setting starting with ` such as

-gen:`mktexpk --dpi ^d --bdpi ^D --mag ^M ^s

-gen:`c:\ptex\bin\MakeTeXPK.exe ^s ^d ^D ^M CanonCX

Note:  If the location of the fonts generated by mktexpk or MakeTeXPK is not given in -TEXPK:, dviout cannot find the generated fonts and an error Cannot resolve Fonts occurs.
If dviout seems to be freezed in creating fonts, see Q_O23.
In some system, makepk.exe is used in place of mktexpk.exe.


By using the rt tpic specials extensions command, strings and monochrome images can be rotated and drawn, as in

\special{rt 0 0 1.57080}RightSide\special{rt 0 0 0}

In addition, when the LaTex2e graphicx.sty is used for dvips output, the rotations and drawings such as the following are possible.

\rotatebox[origin=c]{270}{RightSide}


If many large, high-resolution fonts are used, the font cache buffer should be significantly large (-br: specification).

If data are read from a large font file on the disk, the cache buffer for the font file should also be large (-bf:, -br: specification).

The states for using these buffers are found in the buffer information in "Help -> Buffer Information".


When, for example, the settings such as substituting the NTT JTeX Japanese font by a Windows font (Q_O3) are made on the [JFont2] property sheet and saved by [Save], there is the -vfn: setting on this sheet.  If this is not blank, register it on the Registry.

-vfn: above can select either reading an external file containing the Japanese font settings or Japanese TrueType settings by [WinJFont] (this also corresponds to -vfn:).

If errors are set in -vfn: in the Registry, the Japanese font settings become invalid.

The original state is recovered by setting empty in -vfn: in [JFont2] and [Save]ing it. Moreover [Default] button in [WinJFont] makes the setting there in the default state, which is again saved by [Save].


Complex Japanese fonts settings such as shared use of Windows TrueType Japanese fonts and Japanese fonts in the Typeface Group's format must be written and set in a file.

Refer to utility\dviout.vf0, which is included, and modify it to create the settings file.  Then specify with the -vfn: in the [JFont2] property sheet.  This disables the [WinJFont] specification.


The precedence of the Japanese fonts when actually using dviout for the Japanese fonts in pTeX is given below.  If not found in each stage, the next lower level is searched, the types of Japanese fonts used by pTeX can coexist.

1.  When a jxl4 format font was specified by -TEXPK:, it is used.  When a jfm file was specified, the following results.

2.  When Printing by LIPS III/IV or ESC/Page using a built-in printer driver, a font installed in the printer is used (according to the specifications of Subparameter f of -dviprt:).

3.  If -vfn: of the [JFont2] property sheet is specified, a scalable font is used in accordance with this setting.  If not, the Windows TrueType font is used in accordance with the [WinJFont] setting.

4.  The fixed-size bitmapped fonts specified by -TEXKNJ: are used.


color specials
If -color: in the [Graphic] property sheet is checked, assigning colors to characters and lines is handled by the special command (cf. -color:).

Color specials should be closed in a page.  A color special from one page to another is correctly handled only when the reviewing/printing pages are moved continuousely from the top to the end.
Colors are reset by other kind of page jumps.

Colors are handled only when printing by a Windows driver. Black and white results by a built-in driver.


68 colors
Black, White, Gray, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow,
Orange, Brown, Purple, Violet, Sepia, Tan,
RedViolet, VioletRed, YellowGreen, Goldenrod,
Dandelion, Apricot, Peach, Melon, YellowOrange,
BurntOrange, Bittersweet, RedOrange, Mahogany,
BlueGreen, BrickRed, OrangeRed, RubineRed,
WildStrawberry, Salmon, CarnationPink, Rhodamine,
Mulberry, Fuchsia, Lavender, Thistle, Orchid,
DarkOrchid, Plum, RoyalPurple, BlueViolet,
Periwinkle, CadetBlue, CornflowerBlue, MidnightBlue,
NavyBlue, RoyalBlue, Cerulean, ProcessBlue,
SkyBlue, Turquoise, TealBlue, Aquamarine,
Emerald, Maroon, JungleGreen, SeaGreen,
ForestGreen, PineGreen, LimeGreen, GreenYellow,
SpringGreen, OliveGreen, RawSienna


Since dviout for Windows has an expansion function for TrueType Japanese fonts, it can be used in the English version of Windows so that ASCII's Japanese TeX can use TrueType Japanese fonts.

1. Make the index files (with the extension .tti) of the TrueType Japanese fonts by applying ttindex.exe.  For example,

ttindex c:\windows\fonts\msgothic.ttf

2. The Japanese font definition file is specified by -vfn: in [JFont2] and not by [WinJFont].  The Japanese font definition file (cf. the sample utility\dvioute.vfn) defines how to use the Japanese fonts.

Note: The TrueType font expansion routine in dviout for Windows produces poorer quality, especially for small characters, compared to the Windows system.


- Click left button of the mouse on a letter under pushing CTRL+SHIFT, then the Character Information of the letter is shown.

- Font Information of the dvi file is displayed by Help -> Font Info.


For Times New Roman, Arial etc. or non-default TrueType Japanese fonts, it is recommended to use the attached  winttf.lzh or winttf.tar.gz due to Otobe.  Unpack it in the parent directory of texmf, write the location of ttfonts.map in -ftt: and refere to Virtual font.
For example, under LaTeX2e, please indicate

\usepackage{timesnew}

\usepackage{mathwns}

See ttfonts.map, english.txt and *.tex for more informations.


Embed fonts
Fonts can be embedded into a DVI file.  For example, suppose foo.dvi uses cmr10.300pk and cmr10.360pk under -dpi=300.  At the top of foo.tex

\AtBeginDvi{\special{dviout `initialize -dpi=300 -TEXPK=^F/^s.^dpk}}

is written and by

dviadd cmr10.300pk cmr10.360pk foo.dvi

foo.dvi contains the fonts. Then dviout does not use any outer fonts to display foo.dvi.


 - I want to adjust the irregular printing positions ([Printer])
 - The printed sizes are irregular (Q_P1).
 - Printing takes too much time (Q_P2).
 - I want to use different parameters when printing than those used during the preview(Q_P6).
 - I want to print the page or the range checked in Preview (Q_P4).
 - Preview is correct but the printing result is wrong(Q_P10).
 - "Copies:" in Number of Copies Specification in the print dialog is disabled.
 - What are the differences with the types of possible printing methods? (Q_P7)
 - I want to print by using the console version for dviprt Printing or by using another program
 - I want to use TrueType Japanese fonts in printing by dviout's LBP Driver. (Q_P5)
 - What is the paper size when enlarging or reducing and printing by an LBP? (Q_P8)
 - Taking in printer control codes for the built-in driver.
 - The printing by the built-in dviout driver is poor(Q_P9).
 - Send the dviout file document by fax(Q_P3).
 - When sending a fax, each page is send in separately (Unite Print Jobs).


For example, to print on A4 size paper, the following is required.

1. The original TeX document is created in the A4 size.

2. Set A4 as the paper size in the [Paper] property sheet.

3. Set A4 as the paper size in [Setup] in the print dialog.

When the sizes of the printed characters are irregular or the sizes do not fit even with the A4 setting, the dpi used by dviout and the printer resolution may not match (cf. Setting the Resolution).
This is the case when there appears the warning asking "Use driver resolution?".


For some laser printers such as LIPS III and ESC/Page, dviprt for MS-DOS tried to optimize such as data transfer by downloading fonts.  When printing is done by a Windows system driver in Windows 95/98 or NT, there is no optimization and printing might be slow.

The Windows 95 and NT printer drivers are improved by the printer manufacturers, and new versions of the drivers might be available.  Printing speed may be improved by changing the driver settings or updating the driver.

Printing speed may improve if -cmode: is set to auto-mode or patch2 in the Property Sheets->[Graphic] page and if dviprt is not checked in the dialog of Print.  In particular, this may be efficient if no other fonts than TrueType are used for printing.
This remedy setting to patch2 is appropriate only for printing not for preview but under auto-mode an appropriate method is also  chosen for preview.
One can also use automatic mode changing function for printing (cf. Current mode:) if necessary.  Also, this remedy setting to patch2 does not support printing by dviprt.

Note: Even if the page printer's advertised resolution is 600 dpi, printing may be done in 300 dpi when the printer has insufficient memory, resulting in very slow printing.

If needed, use a built-in dviout for Windows driver (which is particularly efficent for LIPS3,4. ESC/Page. Set raw LIPS IV etc in [Printer] and check dviprt in the dialog of Print), a standard DOS version of dviprt, or a 32-bit version of dviprt.  In this case, -LM: and -TM: adjustments may be necessary.
An external printing program can be used from dviout for Windows (dviprt Printing).


When a fax modem is registered as a Windows printer, documents can be transmitted by fax by selecting the fax modem in [Setup...] in the print dialog.

In order to send more than one page once through a telephone connection, make sure that the [Unite job] parameter in the print dialog is checked.


If only the page previewed immediately before entering the print dialog will be printed, press the [Selection] button in the print dialog.

When a page is marked, either that page is printed or the pages in the specified range while previewing can be printed.  In the latter case, if the page slider is displayed, the range is marked in the slider.

Refer to the Page Selection item.


When printing uses a built-in LBP driver in dviout following to the -dviprt: settings, the default is to use built-in LBP Japanese fonts.  For example, when the following is set for LIPS III, Windows TrueType Japanese font can be used as the Gothic font.

-dviprt:`lgoth=81;0;k

The "k" above means the TrueType Japanese font is downloaded and used.  The "81" is a dummy.  Which font to use for Gothic conforms to the settings on the [WinJFont] of property sheet.
When the printer's built-in Japanese fonts are not used at all, as in

-dviprt:`lv0

For more details, see the information about Subparameter f, Subparameter k for the LBP Driver.


The [REGISTRY] of property sheet is opened.  Suppose Default mode: and Current mode: are both 0.  The following setting example uses 300 dpi in Preview and 600 dpi in mode 2 when printing.

(If [Save] on the [Resolution] sheet was not pressed, execute the save and return.)  First, if Current Name: is blank, write in "Default".  Set 2 in Current Print: and press [Save] (setting in mode 0).

Next, set both "Current mode:" and "Default mode:" to 2, write "Default Printer" in "Current Name:".  Since only -dpi: is changed, press [All Clear].  Then select -dpi:, press [Auto Load], assign "+" only to -dpi:, and press [Save]
 (setting in mode 2).

Then move to the [Resolution] sheet. Set 600 in -dpi: and press [Save] (set in mode 2).  Return to [REGISTRY]. Set "Current mode:" to 0 (return to mode 0). Leave by either [OK] or [Cancel].

In the typical mode 0 state, when using a Windows print driver to print, the data are automatically converted from 300 dpi to 600 dpi (mode 2) and output.  After printing ends, 300 dpi is restored.

The "Default Printer" in mode 2 can be selected in "Option -> Mode" in the Menu Bar and returned to 600 dpi.


1. Printing using a Windows print driver
The default state with the check removed from dviprt in the print dialog
 - Handles color specials, color images (Q_O2), fax transmission (Q_P3)
 - Pause at Each Page function
 - Cancel During Print Data Output
 - Compatible with various printer when the printer manufacturer's driver is used.
 - Using TrueType fonts, printing may become much faster and a good PDF file may be obtained uner a suitable program (if [Graphic]->color specials: -cmode: is auto mode(p2) or patch2)
 - The method of transfering data to driver is different between the cases where -cmode: is auto mode(p2) and auto mode(rep).  The better setteing of -cmode: depends on the driver and the fonts.
For example, the former setting makes the driver to draw characters of TrueType fonts in place of drawing them by dviout.

2. Printing using the built-in dviout driver
Applies when the beginning of -dviprt: is +`  or ` , and dviprt in the print dialog is checked
 - The output codes are optimized; high-speed printing by an LBP, particularly, LIPS III/IV and ESC/Page, is possible; the printer's built-in Japanese font can be used.
 - Taking in printer control codes is possible
 - Printer configuration files (CFG File) can be defined.  Thus each printer model can be handled, and the output can be in any format, such as an image format like PBM or EPSF.

3. Printing by calling an external printer driver
The calling method of the external program is set in -dviprt:.  The case where dviprt in the print dialog is checked is handled.
 - The printing can be done by the console version of dviout or the dvips for PostScript printers.


If there is enlarging or reduction in the print dialog, press the [Setup...] button in the print dialog to set the paper size and orientation, or confirm.
Whether a Windows driver is used, or a built-in dviout driver is used, the [Setup...] dialog appears.

When the [Setup...] button was not pressed(or was canceled by [Cancel] after being pressed)

 - For a Windows driver, the defaults set in the printer driver are followed.  If the error in the paper size actually output is large (vertical or horizontal error exceeds 5%), the confirm message appears.

 - When a built-in dviout printer driver is used, enlarging or reducing is tried and the paper size is guessed.  The commands are sent to the LBP to print on that paper.
For example, if the Preview was for the B4 size, and the B4 -> A4 reduction (81.6%) was checked in the print dialog, the commands for using A4 paper are sent to the LBP.  (Actually, if errors are taken into account, the reduction actually ranges from 77.6% to 85.6%.)  If the paper cannot be guessed, the printing is for the paper size used in the preview.


If dviprt was checked in the print dialog, the built-in dviout driver converts the image data to print control codes and prints.

If the printer does not operate according to its specifications because a different printer model is used or there are bugs in the printer, correct printing may not also be possible.

If an internal LBP Driver for LIPS III/IV or ESC/Page is used, check the settings and the amount of the memory in the LBP printer.

Change the Parameters and test.  For example, for LIPS IV, try

+`lD600;d0
+`lD600;v0
+`lD600;d0;c;u-10

If none of them works well, switch to printing using a Windows driver or create a printer configuration file.


Suppose [Graphic]->color specials: -cmode: is auto mode(p2) which is the default setting(cf.Q_P7).  Preview again by change it temporarily to patch2.

The above patch2 means to preview under the same way in printing. If this preview is correct and the printing is wrong, then it is almost sure that the problem exists in the Windows printer driver(or its setting) or the printer.

If there exists a problem in the Windows printer driver, then try the setting auto mode(rep). In some cases, this resolves the problem (cf.Known Problems).

In the above, the preview and the printing should be tested under the same values of parameters (resolution etc.).  If the paper size or the resolution is not correct, a warning will appear before the printing.


 - The defaults are the Parameters changed on the property sheet. (Q_S1).
 - I want to use parameters during printing that differ from the parameters during previewing ([REGISTRY]).
 - Output of Parameter Setting
 - Example of Parameter Setting
 - I want to start without reading in the settings written in the Registry (cf. Start and Exit)
 - I want to choose different mode at startup (cf. -mode:).
 - I want to delete the contents of the Registry and reinstall (Q_S8).
 - I want to copy the parameter settings to another computer (Q_S2).
 - Format of the parameters settings to read by dviout (Q_S3).
 - I want to read parameters from the file (Q_S4).
 - Edit function when setting or saving parameters (Q_S5).
 - Setting the parameters shared by different machines (Q_S6).
 - I want to appropriately use multiple parameter settings (Q_S7).
 - The parameters were changed, but did not act as expected (Q_S9).
 - The default parameter file is ignored (Q_S10).
 - Automatic Parameter Installation Function


When the Parameters on the property sheet are changed and are enabled at the next start-up, press [Save] on this sheet to save to the Registry.

If the settings in [REGISTRY] sheet have not been changed, this is acceptable.  If not, the settings must be restored so that there is a read at start-up based on the [REGISTRY] sheet:

Select in the list box on the left side of the [REGISTRY] sheet, press [Auto Load] to add.  Then press [Save] in [REGISTRY] to make the actual setting.

In the list box on the left side of the [REGISTRY] sheet, only the parameters marked by + are read in at start-up.
If the top buttons are used ([All Set] in [REGISTRY] marks all of the parameters with +) and [Save] is pressed, the types of parameters read during start-up can be changed.  Since the parameters whose settings are not saved in the Registry are ignored even if the settings are read at start-up, there are no problems.
By pressing [Restore] in [REGISTRY], the current state can be determined.


The Output of Parameter Setting is used to put the settings in the dviout.par file which is placed in the directory containing dviout.exe.  When dviout starts, the parameter settings are read in.

If the "-NULL" is specified in a command line, added and dviout starts, the Registry settings can not overwritten nor changed.

Furthermore, if [Save] is pressed on each property sheet, the read parameters are saved in the Registry.


The setting format for Parameters to be read by dviout is given by "Option -> All parameters".

Generally, a specification has a form of <parameter>=<setting>, and more than one specifications must be delimited by spaces or new lines.  A - may be added before <parameter>.  Also, instead of =, : can be used.  Dviout interprets the specifications in the order of them. If the same parameters are set, they are overwritten.
There are four kinds of parameter format:

1. Parameters specifying integers such as -dpi: and -br:
2. Parameters specifying lengths such as -LM: and -OX:
3. Parameters specifying strings such as -TEXPK:, -gsx: and -Set:
4. Parameters specifying ON or OFF such as -gbox: and -varf:

For details, see the parameter list or use the ? button on each property sheet to get information of each parameter.

Note: Sometimes parameters specifying integers are set by selecting buttons assigned meanings and not by numbers on the property sheet.

If an integer is specified, in addition to decimal numbers, octal and hexadecimal numbers can be used.  For example, when lengths are specified as in

dpi=300
ttf=1000
br=0x64000

the units of mm, cm, in (inch, 1 inch = 25.4 mm), pt (point, 1 in = 72.27 pt), bp (1 in = 72 bp) and dot/<number>dpi.  For example, when the string

LM=4.56mm
RM=54dot/300dpi

is set, if special characters such as spaces or new lines are included, the string is enclosed by single quotes (') or double quotes (") (however, the string may not contain single quotes or double quotes).  The ^$ string represents the null string.

When the parameter represents ON or OFF, on is specified by "+" and off by "-". If the settings are not specified, ON and OFF are reversed (toggle switch).

The line starting with "#" or ";" is a comment line (cf. Choose Parameters).


The file containing the Parameter settings in the format output by "Option -> All parameters" is read by the following methods.

1. dviout -=<parameter_file>

is read in at start-up.  (If -NULL is added, reading the parameters from the Registry is skipped.)

Note: The -= is equivalent to -file=.  Another parameter file is read from a parameter file being read.  The nesting can reach seven levels.

2.The parameter file is selected from the "Option -> Read Parameters" in the menu bar.

3.In "Property Sheets->[System]", write the file name directly in -file: and press [OK].  (When [Save] is pressed, automatic reading at start-up is set.)


The window opened in the Property Sheets input box, "Help -> Information" or "Option -> All Parameters" has editing functions almost identical to those in Notepad.

In particular, by clicking the right button of the mouse after specifying the range, copying between another editor (or a small editor opened from Menu Bar->View Menu) and a window is possible.


There are some cases when many people are sharing one machine such as under Windows NT.

1. Create a dviout.par file in the directory containing dviout (or a Windows directory) and specify default Parameters in that file. (After set various parameters in the property sheet, then  edit them in "Option -> Non-default parameters" and finally output them to a file by output of parameter setting.)

2. Some of the users might want to change parameters from the default.
In such a case, change the parameters in "Option -> Setup parameters," and  save in the Registry.
Then select the [REGISTRY] sheet, mark the + to the parameters he wants to change (at first, all the item on the table might be marked with +'s. Then press the [All clear] button to clear all the +'s.  After that, mark the items +'s he wants to change.), and press the save button.

dviout first reads the parameter file, followed by reading the Registry settings.  Then the parameter values are overwritten with values in the  Registry.


The following methods replace the Parameter values by the several settings made beforehand.

1.  The [REGISTRY] of Property Sheets is used to set the parameters to a different mode.  This can be switched by "Option -> Mode" in the Menu Bar.

2.Several parameter files are prepared and selected from "Option -> Read Parameters" in the menu bar.  (The parameter file can be created with an easy-to-understand file name with the par extension in the subdirectory par of the directory containing dviout.exe.  Refer to "Output of Parameter Setting".)


The contents of the Registry related to dviout are all erased by "Option -> Uninstall."

When there is a version upgrade, since the uninstall of the new dviout also acts on the older dviout, the new dviout.exe, dviout.hlp, and dviout.cnt overwrite and are installed.  Execute uninstall and then the Install procedure can begin.

Refer to the "Uninstall" item.


Pressing ? in the property sheet and clicking the left button of the mouse on the appropriate Parameter often displays the description of that parameter, so refer to the description.

When the [Help] button on a property sheet of the relevant parameters is pressed, the displayed description may be checked.


If there is a file named dviout.par in the dviout directory, dviout reads the parameters from the file when start-up.

If the corresponding Parameters are set "Read" (a "+" mark) in the Property Sheet->[REGISTRY] page, then the parameters are also read from the Windows Registry and overwritten.  (If the default is null, then a null value is written.)

To have the parameter file take precedence over the Registry, cancel the aforementioned "Read from Registry" setting, or set the -file: parameter (Property Sheet->[System] page) to the parameter file.


 - Read in the Image data file.
 - The size read in of the image data file is incorrect (Q_O1).
 - Image data file specials
 - Failure in the image display using PostScript (Q_O9).
 - EPSF figure is over-clipped ([Graphic]->-gclip: PostScript special parameters).
 - Handling color image data (Q_O2).
 - The colored display for color image data is wrong (Q_O17).
 - Displaying color images is extremely slow (cf. -gfit:).
 - Parts of the lines in the image being Previewed disappear (Q_O16).
 - Want to also use color Ghostscript images in black and white (Q_O14)
 - LaTeX2e graphics package is used (Q_O18).
 - PSfrag package is used.
 - tpic specials are used.
 - Sizes of characters and figures are not correct in WMF (Q_O29).
 - The displayed page is saved as a EMF or BMP file etc.(Q_O7)


Be careful when using the -gsize: option or parameters like clip in PostScript \specials that may be affected by magnification by magstep or -mag:.

Note that there may be problems when the size of the imported image is specified by using graphics.sty in the LaTex2e graphic package. So use graphicx.sty instead of that.

Even in PostScript files, some Encapsulated PostScript Files (EPSF) do not have proper format (such as %%BoundingBox: specifications at the beginning of the file).
In this case, the size specification in a PostScript \special does not work properly.


If a BMP format with 16 or more colors is specified in (Property Sheets->[Graphic]->) -GIF: for PostScript color image files, the Preview can be in color.  However, displaying and scrolling become slow.

A 256-color BMP format would be suitable for previews.  Note that you should select a mode with over 60,000 colors in the Windows display settings if possible.  Since many colors are used in a gray scale display in parts outside of the image (cf. Q_V8), much many colors are required for both of text and images.

The size of a color BMP file is very large.  The memory and hard disk must have sufficient room.  For a preview using a high-resolution font such as 600 dpi, check -gfit: to on.

When you use a color printer for Windows, the above images are printed in color by a Windows driver (remove the dviout check in the Printing dialog).

When -GIF: is set to monochrome, color differences are represented in gradations.  A non-color printer will express them with in differences of dot density.  If you send the color image to a non-color printer, the printed result depends on the option settings of the employed Windows driver.

Most kinds of other Image data files are also handled.


When "Save as image" in File Menu in the Menu Bar is selected, the currently displayed page or the indicated region (Display->Region) is saved to a file in BMP or EMF or BMC format.

For another format, the corresponding batch file in the directory utility is serched and if it exists, it is executed.  For PDF the batch file utility\dvi$pdf.bat (in general utility\dvi$extension.bat) is executed.

dvipdfmx newer than 20040204 is necessary for PDF format.

Then the following parameters can be used in general.

%1  horizontal offset  (by cm). default 2.54cm
%2  vertical offset    (by cm). default 2.54cm
%3  width
%4  height
%5  page number
%6  the full pathname of the DVI file
%7  the full pathname of the output
%8  horizontal offset  (by cm). default 0cm
%9  vertical offset    (by cm). default 0cm

Other formats without the corresponding batch file are also possible if the corresponding ABC output plugin is installed in the directory of dviout or the directory of Susie plug-in or its subdirectry named exp_plug.  For example, expng.xpi is for PNG format. The format is decided by the extension of the filename to be indicated.

In the case of BMP or EMF format, it can be copied to Clipboard in place of saving it to a file.

If BMP or BMC format etc. is selected, the saved page is in gray scale when antialiasing is in effect, and colors as in HyperTeX documents or after string search.

However, color images which has more than black and white are not properly handled, nor colored or reversed (in black/white) characters generated by LaTeX2e graphics package.

On the other hand, if EMF(Enhanced Windows MetaFile) format is selected, color images can be handled and TrueType fonts are recorded as scalable fonts.  Hence this format is more efficient in enlarging or/and shrinking size.


1. Is On checked in Ghostscript in "Property Sheets->[Graphic]" ?

2.  When Unknown special:... is displayed
Use a \special that is supported by dviout (cf. "Image data files").

3. When unable to open foo.ps(PS) is displayed
The PostScript file that should be read is not found (be careful when setting -gdat:).

4. When a display appears like Ghostscript cannot be executed such as "Cannot execute gswin32(2)"
Check the -gsx: specification.

5. When Failed to make foo.pbm ...  or foo.bmp ...  is displayed
Ghostscript has called to create a image data file but it cannot be created from a PostScript file.  The causes are

 - An invalid library path for Ghostscript was set.  (Refer to the Ghostscript manual and check the setting of environment variables.)
 - There were parameters that cannot be processed by Ghostscript or there were bad PostScript files (Many graphic software and Windows PostScript drivers output wrong EPSF files).
 - A Ghostscript is used that does not support the output of raw PBM files (or BMP files) specified by -GIF: (Q_E4), or there was an error in a file write (be careful with the current directory or -gdat: settings).
 - in -gsx: specification of Ghostscript's path, space character can not be used.

For example, when "parameter file:" is tmp$.@@@ and the executable file is c:\gstools\gs5.10\gswin32c.exe, open the MS-DOS window, move to the directory containing the dvi files, and execute the following.  The displayed messages may be useful in understanding the causes of errors.

c:\gstools\gs5.10\gswin32c @tmp$.@@@

5 Remark. If Display->Graphics in tool bar is not ckecked, the graphics will be ignored.


When monochrome PBM or monochrome BMP is specified in (Property Sheets->[Graphic]->) -GIF: for PostScript color image files, the Preview is in black and white using gray scale even if the original image is colored.

When monochrome PBM is specified for monochrome in the [Graphic] of Property Sheet, the file name created by Ghostscript is different than the one for color.  Therefore, both files can remain without overwriting.

Although more space in the hard disk is required, it would be useful to use both monochrome and color appropriately depending on the situation.


When Previewing, sometimes some parts of the lines in the read in PostScript image disappear.  This is because the color BMP image created by Ghostscript is compressed by a function provided by Windows and displayed (this is due to the Windows specifications).

A displayed image enlarged with 1:1 magnification, such as loupe, does not produce these kinds of problems.  In addition, since monochrome images are compressed in the gray scale and displayed on the dviout side without relying on Windows, the lines may not disappear even if reduced.

Set -gfit: to ON.


Select 256 colors of BMP or higher in -GIF: of "Property Sheets->[Graphic]".

Usually, even when the Windows display setting is in 256 colors, a 256-color image is not displayed properly in dviout.  The reason is the following.

The Windows system itself is using colors for other process already, and dviout also uses a maximum of 112 colors (of 16.77 million colors) with a 16-level gray scale displaying (each level has 7 colors).  Therefore, the rest of the 256-color resource is not sufficient for another process of displaying with 256-color images.

If the image data has 256 colors, select more than 65,535 colors in the Windows view setting.


When graphicx.sty or graphics.sty or color.sty in LaTeX2e graphics package is used, dviout can understand the dvi file output for dvips. You can employ  colored  character strings, rotating and scaling (colored) character strings or images, and include color image data of EPS files.

Rotating colored images is only possible in 90, 180, and 270 degrees. Scaling fonts created or downloaded by LBP under dviprt Printing is not supported.

If the dviout.def driver for the included graphics package is used, importing PBM, BMP, WMF/EMF images (and many other graphic files with Susie plug-in) can also be handled. This driver is compatible to dvips.def, so PostScript files can be handled as with dvips.def.

In this case, bmc.exe with -b option can write the BoundingBox for a graphic file into a file with the extension .bb, which is used by graphics package to determine the size of the image. For example, the command

bmc -b foo.bmp

makes a file foo.bb where the BoundingBox is written.

Refer to "Examples using PostScript specials" (or more precisely, grfguide.tex in graphics package or the document of dviout.dtx typeset by LaTeX2e in the package of dviout).

dviout does not smooth figures in rotating by graphics packages in LaTeX2e or scaling character strings and figures not in PostScript.

If you want a better print output, use PostScript printer with a dvi driver specially for PostScript.


WMF is not a device independent format.  Hence it happens that characters or figures in WMF may not be in expected sizes if WMF is included by dviout.  Please use EMF(Enhanced MetaFile).


PSfrag
PSfrag can be used by dviout as follows.

1. Copy psfrag.pro in the directory where Ghostscript searches.

2. Put ps2frag.ps in a search path of Ghostscript indicated by the environment variable GS_LIB. Here ps2frag.ps is a PS script file included in the PSfrag package(Version2).

dviout makes a supplementary file with the extension .pfi by Ghostscript and ps2frag.ps for the EPS file using PSfrag if it doesn't exist.

For example, the file for test.ps can be made by

gswin32c -DNODISPLAY -dBATCH -q ps2frag.ps test.eps > test.pfi.


 - Registering dviout on the desktop (Q_O5).
 - I don't want run more than one dviout. (-multi:).
 - How to assign proper icons to dvi files and run dviout by double-clicking on them (i.e., Associating dvi files with dviout).
 - I want to make dviout to Link to Other Programs such as editors.
 - What are the external files and environment variables referenced by dviout (Q_O19)?
 - What is the Current Directory for dviout for Windows?
 - Want to specify the dviout location as the reference in each file specification(Q_O21).
 - How to change the directory (folder) where dviout for Windows is installed (Q_O26).
 - Is there the history of folders of DVI files(folder history)?
 - Want to start from the first/last page of a selected DVI file (->folder history).


In the Explorer, open the directory containing dviout.exe.  Press the right button of the mouse on the dviout.exe icon, drag to the desired desktop position, and release the button.  Then click "Make shortcut".

Shortcuts to dviout.exe can be created, and comments can be edited and changed by clicking the left button of the mouse.


dviout.hlp : dviout on-line help file.
dviout.cnt : contents file for on-line help.
dviout.par : When this is in the directory containing dviout or in the Windows system directory, it is interpreted as the parameter file and read in.  It can also be called dviout.ini.
dviout.vfn : This is the name of the default Japanese fonts and TrueType fonts definition file.  It is not needed when only the Windows TrueType fonts are usually used for Japanese fonts.
dviout.gss : When this is in the directory containing dviout, it is referenced when [Guess] guesses the location of the font.
***.cfg    : Printer definition file (normally not used)
template  : File defining the font creation method.  The file name is valid when specified by -gen:.
par\***.par : Parameter files refered by Option->Choose Parameters.
par\***.pas : Same as the above but is hidden.
par\***.pgm : Paging macro files refered by [Option] in the printing dialog.
par\***.pgn : Same as the above but is hidden.

The TEXPK, TEXFONTS, TEXKNJ, and TEXFLI Parameters can be defined by environment variables.
If the TEXCFG environment variable is present, dviout.par is searched even in that directory.  If the TEMP or TMP environment variable is present, this is interpreted as the directory for creating the temporary files.


When files like -vfn: or -TEXPK: are specified, the directory where dviout is installed can be specified as the standard.

If "^x" is added at the beginning of the path name, it is replaced by the dviout installation directory.  For example, if dviout.exe was installed in c:\dviout, the setting

-gen:^x\utility\template

is identical to the

-gen:c:\dviout\utility\template

setting.


The directory (folder) for dviout for Windows can be renamed or moved.

If the files referenced by dviout (fonts etc.) are moved, however, the setting in the Property sheets must be changed accordingly.

Filenames relative from the dviout directory need not be changed if dviout is moved in the same manner (Q_O21).


folder history
In the Menu Bar, DVI file history is shown by File or File -> History.

dviout shows the selected DVI file.  If CTRL key (resp. together with SHIFT key) is pressed in the selection of the DVI file, the firt (resp. last)  page is shown in place of the page last dsplayed.
On the ther hand, if only SHIFT key is pressed, the folder where the selected DVI file exists is opened.


 - NO_FONT: *** (Q_E1)
 - Unpack_Error: *** (Q_E2)
 - Warning: Cannot find cmr10.tfm for TT Font (Q_E3)
 - Cannot resolve Fonts
 - Ghostscript is started, but "Unknown device" is displayed. The images of PostScript files are not imported (Q_E4).
 - Not enough memory(Q_E8).
 - Since this program performs illegal processing, it is forcibly terminated (Q_E7).
 - The warning message window is complicated (Q_E9).


The fonts used by the dvi file are not found.
The information about the font that was searched for will be displayed. Check the settings such as -TEXPK:.

Even if the fonts really do not exist, by using -F: to specify a substitute font, displaying or printing is still possible (Handling Missing Fonts).

The best solution is creating fonts or revising -TEXPK:.  For European language fonts, the Automatic Font Generation function for nonexistent fonts can be used (METAFONT starts and the generated font is stored by the procedure set by -gen:).

Note: The displayed path names are the path name searched by dviout based on -TEXPK:.  They are not only for required file names.

You can examine the font information by "Help -> Font Information"


The PK files is corrupted.  Erace it and recreate it.


A European language TrueType font is used, but the corresponding tfm file (in this example, cmr10) was not found.

The character alignment information is obtained only from *.ttf, there might be some offsets in the character positions.  Set the correct directory for the *.tfm tfm files in -TEXFONTS: (unlike -TEXPK:, the font names should not be included).


The output format (Device), such as pbmraw, bmpraw, bmp16, bmp256, and bmp16m, in Ghostscript is supported.  This must correspond to the -GIF: setting.

Note that due to the patent issue, version 2.6.2 and later versions of Ghostscript does not support the output in the GIF format.


A String Search only examines the dvi files.  Expecting 100% accuracy is impossible and the results are incorrect (cf.-sFont:).

For English words, rather short words are avoided in a word unit search.  This reduces the possibility of incorrect searches.

For dvi files by NTT JTeX, Japanese string searches are not supported.


This error has a high probability of being a problem in dviout for Windows.

If there seem to be problems in dviout, notify the developers or the dviout Users Group with information about the start-up state and how to reproduce the problem.


The memory required to operate dviout cannot be allocated.  The font resolutions, the paper size, etc. affect greatly the required memory size.

For example, when Printing by a 600 dpi printer on the A3 paper size, a minimum 8 Mbyte memory is needed for the page expansion buffer, and a minimum 8 Mbyte memory is needed for transferring BMP format data.

It is desirable to use a computer that has sufficient usable memory.  Memory consumption by other application programs also affects the performance of dviout.


When "View -> Warning" in the tool bar is selected and the check is removed, the window for a warning message display no longer opens.

Since the message is recorded, when this window is opened by "Help -> Information," for example, going back and looking at the message is possible.  Even is the above check is removed, if this window remains open, its message is displayed.

The ON and OFF states of this check are not inherited in the next dviout after dviout ends.


Cannot resolve Fonts

This means that dviout searched a necessary font by the setting of -TEXROOT: and -TEXPK: but dviout could not find it.

Usually the font and the searched files are shown.  The reason may be as follows.

1. In the case when METAFONT had tried to make the font (i.e. the setting of Automatic Font Generation -gen: is defined).

 - The font cannot be generated by METAFONT.
For example, a TrueType font should have been used through Virtual font but the TrueType font is not registered by Windows system.

 - METAFONT failed to generate the font.
If GEN_TMP.BAT is made in the directory where the Windows temporary directory (which should be defined by the environment variable TMP or TEMP, the execution of it may indicate the cause of the error at the time when this message is shown (without quitting dviout).
This batch file equals the command that dviout executes to generate the font.

Incorrect setting of -gen: or texmf.cnf or the environment variable TMP or TMP or the no existence of mf.exe in the directory indicated the environment variable PATH or incorrect environment variables for METAFONT working under a non-standard shell in the background can be the cause.

 - The font was correctly made by mktexpk etc. but dviout could not find it.
Check the directory where the fonts exists (see the following term 2) and compare it with the setting of -gen:, -TEXPK: and texmf.cnf.

Remark. Check the existence and the location of the font to have been made as follows.

2. Incorrect setting of -TEXROOT: or -TEXPK:.
In the case when kpathsearch is supported, kpsewhich.exe indicates the location of the font.  For example, in MS-DOS Window, execute it by the command

  kpsewhich cmr17.360pk

if the top of the Information Windows with the title Cannot resolve Fonts is as follows

  cmr17.360(1800)

Here the second number is equal to 5 times of the resolution in dpi.  Moreove
the results of the following commands will be useful:

  kpsewhich --expand-braces $TEXMF
  kpsewhich --expand-braces $MFINPUTS
  kpsewhich --expand-braces $MKTEX_MODE
  kpsewhich --expand-braces $PKFONTS

3. The font doesn't exist and cannot be generated.
Substitution of the font by -F: may be used.  In this case, make Automatic Font Generation invalid.


 - The result of a String Search is incorrect (Q_E6).
 - "Help Topics" is only displayed by keywords, and a table of contents is not output (Q_O13).
 - dviout freezes when trying Automatic Font Generation or starting Ghostscript (Q_O23).
 - dviout reports errors and does not start up normally (Q_O25)
 - Known Problems
 - The settings conformed to the description, but the operation was poor (Q_O11).


The state capable of displaying and printing in dviout is entered (Install).
The device drivers used in TeX for Windows by Impress becomes executable files with names like windvi.exe, windvi32.exe, wdvipro.exe, and wdvip32.exe.  When dviout replaces these files by ones with the same names, dviout can be used in an integrated environment for TeX for Windows.

For example, when wdvipro.exe is used, the dviout.exe file name changes to wdvipro.exe and is only copied to the directory containing wdvipro.exe (wdvipro.exe is set to another name like wdviprold.exe to prevent overwriting and deletion).
If the dviout.hlp, dviout.cnt, wdvipro.hlp, and wdvipro.cnt names are changed and placed in the same directory, help can also be used.

Each type of editor macro developed using TeX for Windows can also be used.

Note: If you use Europian Language TrueType Fonts of WinTeX, go Option->Setup Paramaters...->[WinJFont] choose edefault in jfm/tfm and check off Japanes TT and select WinTeX in code type and [Define], [Save], [OK].
Specify the path of jfm/tfm files in -TEXPK:.


If you have result which is different from the description in the help file, you might have made some mistakes.  The possibilities are followings:

1. Misreading of the description
2. Mistakes in the description
3. dviout bugs
4. Windows 95/98 or NT bugs

Cases for 3 and 4 might only occur under special settings of dviout or the environment in Windows 95/98 or NT.

If you can specify your problem is due to 2, 3 or 4, please report them to the dviout Users Group or the developers.  In this case, please describe details about the states so that they can be reproduced by the developers.  This would make it easier to find the problem, then the problem might be solved in a rather short time.

Dviout uses various low-level processing functions supported by the Windows system.  During the development, the developers have already encountered some of such low-level bugs or problems. Most of them has been already solved by dviout's functions.

The Source Code of dviout is publicly available.  So, when you think that your problem is due to item 3, it would be extremely helpful if you can fix the source.


When only the keywords and not the table of contents appear in "Help -> Help Topics," the Windows help system might not be able to find the dviout.cnt file.

The information in the dviout.gid hidden file (file created automatically by Windows) in the directory containing dviout.exe might be in error.

When the directory is c:\dviout and

attrib c:\dviout\dviout.*

is specified in the DOS window, the existence of that file can be verified.

This can be handled by deleting

attrib -H c:\dviout\dviout.gid
del c:\dviout\dviout.gid

In the Explorer, switching the radio button "display all files(S)" ON in a tag appeared by "display menu bar(V) -> Option(O)", the above deletion is also possible.


On some Windows systems/machines, dviout seems to be freezed when launching METAFONT or Ghostscript.

Not that this does not mean that dviout is hanging; it's just waiting for the launched program to return.

This problem, probably due to the Windows system or environment, can be solved in one of the following ways.

1. If mktexpk or MakeTeXPK is indicated in -gen:, set its full pathname with the extension .exe and some parameters following after `.

2. Open the properties (by clicking right button of mouse) of Start->Program->MS-DOS prompt and command(.com) or cmd.exe and/or _default.pif in the Windows' system directory.
Examine that the check of "Program->Close window after the end of program" is ON and the check of "Others->When the window is not active->Allways stop procedure" is OFF.
If there are any differences, correct them.
Moreover, set "Others->Priority of other program" lower.

3. Set -Wshow: to ON.

4. Kill the launched program (ex.CTRL+ALT+DEL).


If the Windows Registry becomes inconsistent for some reason, dviout may report errors on startup and deny further operation including modification of Parameters.  In this case, invoke dviout from the command line thus:

dviout -NULL

This should start dviout without reading parameters from the Registry.  You may need to type the full path of the dviout if it is not in the command search path.


 - I want to define a function such as the page jump to a key or a tool button(Q_O10).
 - What is the function of the button on the tool bar with the shape of a smiley face(Q_O4)?
 - Erase the name of an old dvi file in the list of files(Q_O24).
 - In the TeX for Windows by Impress, dviout is used when previewing or printing (Q_O6).
 - What is HyperTeX?
 - A dvi file on the Internet is displayed by dviout (Q_O8).
 - In a preview window, consult words or sentences by a dictionary or execute URL(Q_O27).
 - original extensions by dviout(Q_O28)
 - I want to display more information when adjusting the Parameters(Q_O15).
 - Why doesn't dviout recognize paper size(Q_O22)?
 - How does dviout display a page(Q_O30)?
 - I want to expand the function (Q_O12).
 - Source Code of dviout


Associating dvi files with dviout, if the Internet Explorer reads a dvi file with the dvi extension, dviout is automatically started and Preview or Print it.

When the jump destination in the HyperTeX displayed in dviout is a dviout file on the Internet, click the left button of the mouse to automatically display by dviout.


If "Option -> Install" has already been executed, making the initial settings of the Parameters by "Option->Install" again and registering the dviout to the start-up menu do not interfere.

When different settings are made, only the previous settings are rewritten.  "Option -> Uninstall" is not needed.

If the directory (folder) containing dviout for Windows was changed, "Option -> Install" should probably be executed again.


When the Japanese font in NTT JTeX is replaced by the Windows TrueType font, specify the Font Metric File of a Japanese font of ASCII pTeX, such as min10.tfm, in -TEXPK:, and set -ntt: to on.  The -L: setting does not truncate the file name or the middle must be cut out.

To define a new Japanese font in NTT JTeX use the -nttF: option.


This button allows the user to redefine a function. Since the last "Button" of Key: in "Property Sheets->[Key]]" handles this, the left Function: can be selected and the function defined.

Note that the user can also redefine functions on the other 5 buttons (User1,...,User5) adjacent to this button. There are 6 buttons in Tool Bar on which the user can redefine functions.

[Save] can be used to register in the Registry, "-key:" can be added to [Auto Load] in [REGISTRY], and then the settings can become the defaults by using [Save] in [REGISTRY] (cf. Q_S1).


For example, when the "B" key is pressed, returning to the previous page is done as follows.

1. Select "Option -> Setup Parameters... -> [Key]".

2. Select "Previous Page" in the Function: box.  Selection "B" in the Key: box.  Press [Define].

3. Press [Apply] to adapt to the current session.

4. Press [Save] to save to the Registry.  The definitions become the defaults in subsequent uses.
In the [REGISTRY] sheet, check the parameters with + added at the beginning of the key items in the list box.  (If they are not marked, use the [Auto Load] key to add + and press the [Save] in [REGISTRY] key.)

Note: Since the keys are distinguished by uppercase and lowercase letters, to assign the same function to "b" after performing 2 above, select "b" in the Key: box and press "Define."

In 3 and 4 above, defining or changing all of the key functions may be executed only once.

It is similar to define a function on some tool buttons(cf. [Key], Q_O4, Q_V10).


\special commands are being planned to be functions that can be fairly freely defined and used by the user.

In addition, various functions may be demanded.  The Source Code is publicly available.  Based on this, users can freely add functions.

If you believe that including useful functions and making improvements to the public version of dviout would be beneficial, do not hesitate to contact "the developer" or "the dviout Users Group".


The dviout source code is publicly available along with the executables.

Visual C Ver.5.0 or Ver.6.0 is used to create the executable file dviout.exe.  If this C compiler is properly installed, dviout.exe can be created as follows.

1. Set the environment so that the compiler in command version can work properly.

2. Extract the dviout source files in an appropriate directory.

3. The directory where the source is expanded is set as the current directory.  When the following command is executed in the MS-DOS prompt window, dviout.exe is created.

   nmake /f makefile.vc

If C++ Builder 4.0 is used in place of VC, execute

   make -fmakefile.cpb

dviout.exe can be created by Borland C 5.01J or Visual C Ver.4.0. If Borland C is used, then the line

BC5=C:\BC5

at beginning of the makefile should be changed to the directory where Borland C is installed and one executes the command make at the directory where the source files are expanded. A similar change may be necessary also in case of using C++ Builder.

The help file is generated using MakeHelP from dvioute.mhp.  Use hcw.exe for the help compiler.  (hc31.exe generates errors.)

Note 1. The file dvioute.cnt in the distribution package is a hand-modified version of what MakeHelP generates.  Be aware that when MakeHelP is executed, dviout.cnt is overwritten.

Note 2. If you distribute a modified version of dviout.exe, make sure to state clearly that it is not the original Distribution.  If the definition of the VERSION_NO of version.h is rewritten, the display by "Help -> About dviout" also changes.  The strings in the dialog of IDD_ABOUTDIALOG in dviout.rc can be appropriately modified.


If dviout for Windows is started from a command line with the "-wait=0" option, the following results are useful when adjusting the Parameters.

 - A warning is often displayed at each problem location.

 - The temporary parameter file that is passed when starting Ghostscript is not deleted and remains.


Dvi files, which TeX outputs, do not contain information on paper size (such as A4, B5) or orientation (such as landscape).  On the other hand, in dvi files by LaTeX, these information are specified.

Sometimes even if a dvi file does have a size entry, it may not be the actual paper size.  (It may even be zero!)  This is why dviout does not set the paper size automatically from the dvi file.

It is up to the user to specify the paper size and orientation in the Property Sheet->[Paper] page or use dviout specials.


To delete a dvi filename from the File menu in Menu Bar and the history (File->History), select the file from File->History, press [Hide], then quit dviout.  The next invocation of dviout does not show the filename on the File menu.

If dviout is killed by File->Quit, the dvi history record is not updated.

These techniques are useful after reading dvi files from floppy disks and other removable media.


By clinking the left mouse button while pushing SHIFT key, a word or sentence pointed by the mouse cursor is picked up.

In an edit window appeared, by pushing [Copy],  the word or sentence is copied to Windows' clipboard and then you can consult its meaning by a suitable dictionary or paste it to an editor.

If the word or sentence has a special meaning defined by Windows such as URL, an executable file or a graphic file etc., pushing [Execute] makes Windows handle it suitably.  For example,

http://akagi.ms.u-tokyo.ac.jp/ftp.html#TeX

means to jump there by WWW browser,

mailto:dviout-admin@akagi.ms.u-tokyo.ac.jp

means to execute a program to write a mail and

c:\tmp\picture.jpg

means to display this picture if it exists.


Original extensions by dviout which may not be used by other dviwares and should be remarked:

specials
- Many Image data file specials with parameters which have been used by different dviwares are simultaniously supported.

\special{bmpfile=file_name parameters}

with Susie plug-in for many graphic formats.

- reading specials from a file by \special{file=file_name}

- tpic specials extensions

- dviout specials

- Presentation Mode with cover sheet and pause special

- source specials (compatible to MikTeX & yap)

Other
- Embedding into DVI file


Since dviout gets the DVI file, the default procedure to preview a page described in the file is as follows.

0. dviout reads the DVI file and make a table of the locations of the top of all pages in the DVI file.
Moreover dviout makes a list of the way to get the image data (eg. TrueType fonts registered in Windows system of PK files in the DISK etc.) to be used for each TeX font in the DVI file according to -TEXPK: etc.

1. dviout interprets the discription of the page in DVI file and draws a two-colored (black and white) image data of the page.
dviout keeps in the memory the image data or the pointers of the image of colored letters by color special or colored (incl. gray scaled) graphic images.

2. dviout reduces the two-colored image data int a 256 (or 16) colored image data considering the background color.  The letters will be gray scaled (anti-aliasing) with 16 levels.
The anti-aliasing of 16 levels for 8 colors of letters and of 16 levels for 8 colors of background is used for the hot spots of HypreTeX or the searched strings.  For this purpose, the reduced BMP image data has the pallet of 256 colors.
In this case, 1 pixel corresponds 1 byte and the lower 4 bits represent the level of the gray scale, and the upper 3 bits excluding the higest bit represent the color and the highest bit means the color is for back ground or letters.
For example, the colored underline is realized by coloring the line as background.

3. dviout displays the BMP image data, colered letters and image data by using Windows API.  Here dviout changes the BMP data for the hot spot of HyperTeX.

Remark: dviout interprets \special at the stage 1.  If dviout specials exist, dviout interprets them and then returns to the begining of the stage 1 and proceeds to 1, 2 and 3.  More precicely, it is as follows.

dviout interprets dviout specials according to the order in DVI file.

- If there exists a key input expressed by two letters including a small letter, then dviout puts the command "execute the corresponding key input" in the end of the "list of commands to be executed" and the real execution is postoponed.

- If there exists `timer, dviout sets that the dviout specials after there will be executed later after the defined time and the execution is postponed.

- If there exists `wait or ;, then the command "execute dviout specials after there" is set at the end of the "list of the commands to be executed" and the execution is postponed.

- After the stage 3, the commands in the "list of commands" are successively executed from the top as the above.
It is the same for the execution of the commands sets by `timer.

In this case, if there exists a command of key input (except for the redrawing) which associates with the redrawing the screen, the command to "redraw the screen" is put at the end of the "list of commands" when the key input command is executed.


Parameters
Various parameters when starting dviout are read in the order given below.  If the settings conflict within those files, the latest read one will become effective.

1. dviout.par parameter file in the directory where dviout.exe exists.
If this is not found, the Windows directory is also searched.
2. Setting items written in the Registry specified to be read automatically.
3. Settings in the environment variables
4. Specifications on the command line

When the parameter file name in -file: in the parameters is specifically written, that parameter file is read when the file name is interpreted.

See Q_S3 for the parameter file format.

If the -NULL option parameter is specified on the command line, reading from the Registry will be skipped.

List of all the parameters can be shown in the Parameter List and Example of Parameter Setting.


-Jfm:
Use jfm data in dviout(Property Sheets->[JFont2] Default: ON)
It supports min*, tmin*, goth*, tgoth*, newmin, newjis, jis, jisg, jis-v, jisg-v.


-Jgt:
The narrow letters of TrueType Japanese Fonts are adjusted to  TeX fonts by using the glue information of the jfm file(Property Sheets->[JFont2]).

OFF: default
They are determined by the codes of the letters.

ON: They are adjusted by the value of the maximal value of the GLUE after the default character defined in the jfm file.


-Jbt:
The baseline for Kanji TrueType fonts is adjusted by the corresponding jfm file(Property Sheets->[JFont2]).  This parameter has a value ON or OFF (default: ON).

If the value is OFF or the ratio height:depth of the default character type of the jfm file equals that of min10.tfm or jis.tfm, the baseline of the TrueType font coincides with the baseline in TeX.


-A:
The search range for the fonts handling the required resolutions is enlarged (cf. Property Sheets->[Font2]).Zero or a positive integer is specified.

The resolution of the font calculated by dviout and the font name are used to obtain the required font based on the -TEXPK: specification.  The resolution value is rounded off to an integer and substituted in ^d or ^l in -TEXPK:
Since there are problems with the difference, a total of the three closest values above and below are searched for.  This search range is expanded only by the number specified in "-A:".

Example -A:4

The above setting expands the search range up to seven values above and below.


-area:
When printing uses a Windows printer driver, the driver's default value is used for the width of the unprintable region (Property Sheets->[Printer]).  If this does not properly adjust the print positions, uncheck the box and adjust with -LM: or -TM:.

When a built-in dviout driver is used, this parameter is ignored and the -LM: and -TM: settings are followed.

This parameter is set ON or OFF.


-base:
The base line of each character is displayed (Property Sheets->[System]).  This parameter switches only ON/OFF.

This can be used for checks such as proofreading.


-bb:
This is the maximum allowable size of the buffer for enlarging the image of a page (Property Sheets->[System]).  This is specified by a positive integer.


-BM:
This represents the width of the unprintable area at the bottom of the paper.  This parameter is specified as a length.

Usually, this setting would not be necessary (cf. Property Sheets-> [Printer]).


-BMP:
"-BMP:" is the option specified on the command line or in the parameter file. The setting is made in the [Display] of Property Sheets.

When "-BMP:<x>:<y>:<z>" is set, the gray scale display is compressed by 1/<x> in the horizontal direction and 1/<y> in the vertical direction.  The <z>/1000 performs gamma correction.
If -<z> is set instead of <z>, the screen is displayed in reverse the black/white.

If ":<z>" is omitted, the interpretation is "<z>=800".  If ":<y>:<z>" is omitted, the interpretation is <y>=<x>.  The default is

-BMP:4:4:800


-bf:
This is the cache buffer size for a font file such as the PK font (Property Sheets->[System]).  This is specified by a positive integer.


-box:
The range occupied by the characters is changed to a box to replace the characters (Property Sheets->[System]). This parameter takes a value ON or OFF.

It would be useful for checks such as proofreading.


-br:
This is the cache buffer size holding the bitmaps of each character (Property Sheets->[System]). This is specified by a positive integer.


-bright:
This adjusts the brightness of the paper surface in the Preview.  The maximum brightness of 255 is the default (Property Sheets->[Display]).  A positive integer of 255 or less is specified.


-Browser:
When there is an external reference by HyperTeX, or when using a browser not supported by default by the Windows system (when Property Sheets->[HyperTeX]->non-default Browser is checked), the path name should be specified.


-button:
This links the default of a tool bar button to a jump such as "Forward/Backward History" (Property Sheets->[System]).  This parameter has a value ON or OFF.


-c:
When the "-c:" option is turned ON, the match of the font written in the dvi file to the font actually loaded is examined by using the checksum data (Property Sheets->[Font2]).  This parameter takes a value ON or OFF.

If there is no match, a message like

check sum doesn't match in Font 35:

is displayed.
The number after "Font" is the font number in the dvi file (cf. Information display -> Font Information).

This error means that the tfm file used by TeX does not match the data in the loaded font that was actually loaded.  This error occurs when the versions of the two files are not the same.


-cmode:
This parameter determines how the colors of characters and lines are superimposed.  It takes an integer parameter with the values of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6(Property Sheets->[Graphic]).  Corresponds to -gow: for images.

0 (auto mode(p2)): Normal operation is to REPLACE (hide the bottom color when painting over) for prevew, patch2 for non-dviprt Printing and replace(bak) for Presentation Mode.  However for preview, if it is guessed that erasing the lower color is not needed, it is painted over and not erased.

1 (merge)    : When painting over, the colors mix (when the r suboption is not included in color specials).  When mixed, the color gets closer to the normal character color (black when not the reverse screen).

2 (replace(def)): Always process by REPLACE.  Antialiasing is performed with respect to the default background (paper) color.  In case of printing, this is same as the next "replace(def)".

3 (replace(bak)): Always process by REPLACE.  The color before the previous push is considered to be the background color and antialiasing is performed.

4 (patch)    : Replace by each character, line and figure. This is slow in display. dviprt Printing is not valid.

5 (patch2)   : Replace by each character, line and figure. TrueType fonts are directy handled by Windows drivers.  Loupe and dviprt Printing are not valid.  This is slow in display but may be fast in Printing.  It deeply depends on the Windows printer driver.
The character in TrueType font indicated "slant" option in [WinJFont] or indicated both rotation and scaling is not directly output through Windows API but treated as in "patch" mode.
The character in TrueType font indicated only rotation or only scaling is expected to be output in better quality than in other modes.

6 (auto mode(rep)): This is same as auto mode(p2) but replace for non-dviprt Printing.

Note: Colored characters undergo antialiasing (gray scale when black and white).  The blurring of color characters on the reduced Preview view is eliminated. Since some problems cannot be handled by REPLACE, the character outline becomes a faint color.

When Printing under Windows driver, usually process "patch2" for "auto mode".


-color:
When -color: is set to on, colors can be assigned to characters and lines by \specials given below(Property Sheets->[Graphic]).

color push gray x
color push rgb x y z
color push cmyk x y z n
color push hsb x y z
color push color
color pop
background <col>

are supported.  "x", "y", "z", and "n" are real numbers between 0 and 1.  "color" is assigned any one of 68 colors, such as black, white, red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, yellow.  In "<col>", the color specification after the "push" above it is used.Spaces and commas delimit the color specifications.

If colors are painted over by the AND operator, for example, yellow on top of green is not visible, but turns to black when red is drawn.  If the "r" suboption is added at the end of each special, replace is used to make replacements.  However, white is always replaced (cf. -cmode:).

The color specifications for dvips are handled by graphicx.sty in LaTeX2e.  When "Display -> Color replace" is checked in the tool bar, the default is replaced.

Note: These definitions are considered to be independent on each page.


-dpi:
This sets the dpi value for the resolution in the horizontal direction of the font used (Property Sheets->[Resolution]).This is specified by a positive integer.

If the resolution in the vertical direction (-dpiv:) is not set, the vertical resolution is regarded as the same resolution as the horizontal direction.


-dpiv:
This sets the resolution in the vertical direction.  If it is not set, the horizontal resolution specified by -dpi: is regarded as same as the vertical resolution (Property Sheets->[Resolution]).


-dviprt:

If this parameter is specified, the dviout printer driver are invoked instead of the Windows driver for printing. Or it specifies command for calling another program such as the console version of dviprt for printing.

Changing the defaults of printing
+  If a plus sign (+) is added to the beginning of -dviprt: in the [Printer] of Property Sheets, the default becomes printing based on the dviprt settings.

The leading "+" is removed in the display when reading [Setup...] from the print dialog.  Do not add it, in usual case.  Although this can be changed, the change is considered to be a temporary one-time change and is not registered.

Using built-in dviout print drivers
`        When the beginning is ` or +` , printing under the dviprt settings is done by the built-in drivers.
The function is determined by the following characters (based on the specification following the -p=  in the MS-DOS version).
`e    ESC/P compatible output (default of 180 dpi).
`p    PC-PR compatible output (default of 160 dpi).
`n    NM compatible output (default of 300 dpi).
`l     LIPS III/IV compatible output (default of 300 dpi)  Subsequent suboptions can be specified..
`lD600 LIPS IV compatible output (default of 600 dpi)  A semicolon (;) is inserted and subsequent suboptions can be specified.
`m    ESC/Page compatible output (default of 300 dpi)  Subsequent suboptions can be specified.
`o    A specification for an external configuration file follows.
If "e", "p", "n", "l", "m", and "o" above are uppercase letters, they are not dviout settings, but use the default resolution (dpi) defined for each one.
The suboptions can be specified for LIPS III/IV and ESC/Page LBP Drivers.

Controlling external programs
If the beginning is not `  or +` , the execution command is indicated.  Specifically, a batch file is created and is responsible for processing.

However, when this is not multiple statements, but is only one line and the end of the first command, excluding the command's parameters, is ".exe", the batch file is not created and the command is directly executed.

The following keywords can be used.

;     Represents the newline in multiple statements.
^t    Full path name of the temporary files that can be freely used (If the environment variable TMP or TEMP is set, this is the directory.  If they are not set, the path name is the "dvitmp.$$$" directory containing dviout.)
^q   Full path name of the target dvi file
^d   The string deleted .dvi from ^q
^D   Name of the dvi file without its directory and extension
^p   Printing range in the dviprt format (For dual page printing, macros are also included.)
^P   This represents dviprt.exe^-=^f^^q^^p.
^f   File writing out the option parameters (Determines the parameters required by dviout from -harf:, -mag:, -lc:, -Z:, -OX:, -OY:, -varf:, -e:, -o:, -y:, and -nf:.
For example, -OX: judged to be required when it is not zero. However, -y: is always included.)
Specifically, this is the dvitmp.par file in the same directory as ^t.
^S  Represents ^.
^s  Represents space.  If the next character is not a letter, the "s" can be omitted.
^A  Start page (logical page)
^B  Stop page (logical page)
^a  Start page (physical page)
^b  Stop page (physical page) )
^c  Number of copies (corresponds to -lc:)
^e  Reduction/magnification ratio(corresponds to -e:)
^m  Displays the selections by "Option for Paging" in the print dialog (number from 0 to 5)
^n  Indicates the position of the right page in dual page printing (corresponds to W: in the print dialog, width represented in cm like 14.85 cm)
^y  Paper size and orientation (corresponds to -y:, "A4P", etc.)
^h  Horizontal position adjustment (corresponds to -OX:, cm format such as 1.25cm)
^v  Vertical position adjustment (corresponds to -OY:, cm format)
^o  Page printing order (corresponds to -o:, any of the six choices "r", "o", "e", "re", "ro" or space)
^x  Directory containing the dviout to be started
^W  paper size and orientation, odd/even/reverse, offet (-OX: -OY:) for dvips
^w  paper size (A3-6, B3-6, Letter, Legal) and orientation, offset (-OX: -OY:) for dvipdfm
^Z or ^Z^n^{...}^{...}  The part after this is a message and shown in the Print dialog.  At most one ; is possible in the message.
Here n is an integer whose bits correpond to the validities of the following functions.
   1: Collate Copies
   2: Reverse order
   4: Copies
   8: + button
  16: Option button
  32: Unite 2 pages
  64: Reduce/Magnify
^z or ^z^n^{...}^{...}  This is the same as above but an Window is open for the external program.
^{...} is a check box defined by a user.  At most two check boxes are defined.  ... is the string shown at the check box.
^X^{...}  ... is skipped if the first check box defined by the user is not checked.
^X^}...{  ... is skipped if the first check box defined by the user is checked.
^Y^{...}  ... is skipped if the second check box defined by the user is not checked.
^Y^}...{  ... is skipped if the second check box defined by the user is checked.

If -dviprt: is a space or only a plus sign (+), the defaults are set.  Refer to "Example of dviprt Settings" and the manual for the dviprt being used.


-e:
The vertical and horizontal sizes are magnified or reduced.  A variable-size font like a Windows TrueType font is magnified and reduced accordingly.  The vertical and horizontal sizes are converted to 1/1000 of the set value (Property Sheets->[Resolution]).  This parameter takes a positive integer or 0.

0 means to reset this function.

When magnifying or reducing to match " -e:" for all of the fonts, -varf: is specified.


-edge:
By Presentation Menu->Cut edge, the spaces along the edges of each page are cut with only the spaces indicated by the number in dots (Property Sheets->[Paper]).
If page Range is indicated (cf. Alt+JM, Alt+JE), the the pages to be checked are restricted in this range.

The default number is 16.


-F:
The -F: specification specifies how to make a substitution, to blank out or skip when the required font are missing (in a search based on -TEXPK:) (Property Sheets->[Font]). This is specified in a string.


-FB:
In relation to font substitution by -F:, this specifies whether to use a substitute font, correct the size if the substitute font has a different size, or replace with spaces or black boxes (Property Sheets->[Font]).

This is an integer type variable and is specified by a number in the parameter file.

0(replace): Use the substitute font specified by -F.
1(blank): Blank out with spaces based on the substitute font specified by -F.
2(black box): Draw a black box based on the substitute font specified by -F.
3(adjust size): Adjusts the size when a substitute font specified by -F is used, but the size is magnified or reduced for a different resolution (dpi).


-file:
This specifies the parameter file read by dviout (cf. Q_S3).
When specified in the [System] of Property Sheets and set to be read at start-up, after the parameters are read from the Registry, this parameter file is read and overwritten.

When ^x is added at the beginning of the path name, it is replaced by the directory where dviout is installed.  Likewise, ^w is replaced by the Windows directory.

When started, dviout looks for dviout.par or dviout.ini in the directory containing the dviout.exe.  Failing that, it then searches the Windows directory.

The parameter file can include other files; the nesting can be up to seven levels.


-Fkeep:
If this option is set to ON, dviout saves locations of often-used fonts to make dviout start quicker (Property Sheets->[Font2]).

This option is especially useful when the -TEXPK: entry contains a \\ or // construct (for recursive directory search).  To erase the record, press [Flush] button.

If one of the following conditions is met, the font information is not recorded.

1. When the font filename matches an -TEXPK: entry with two or more \\ or // constructs.  (-TEXPK: entries as a whole may contain several of such constructs.)

2. When the -TEXROOT: or -TEXPK: parameter is altered after startup.

3. When the font is substituted by the -F: option.

Dviout maintains a score for each fontname-resolution pair.  The score is a nonnegative integer not greater than 255.  Up to 400 fonts with high scores are recorded.  Whether a font is used is examined when dviout quits.  If several fonts have the same current score, dviout steps backward in the history of font usage, until the scores becomes inequal.

The score is calculated by the following rules:

1. The score of 64 is given if the font is used for the first time in the record.

2. If the font in the record is not used this time, the new score will be the last score (at the time of previous quit) times 15, divided by 16, plus 16, rounded down to the nearest integer.

3. If the font is in the record but not used this time, the score will be the last value times 15 divided by 16, rounded down to the nearest integer.


-ftt:

Indicate the file describing the map of TeX fonts to TrueType fonts(Property Sheets->[Font2]).

On each line in the file, the TeX font and the corresponding font (which should be defined in jfm/tfm in [WinJFont]) is written separeted by spaces or tabs.

To use subfonts for the correspondence of fonts and codes, the location of SFD files of subfonts are indicated by -TEXSUBF: and the font name in TeX replacing last two digit numbers by "@" followed by the corresponding SFD filename replacing the extension .sfd by "@" is written in place of the simple TeX font name.

If '/' followed with the character(s) I, B, U, O, R, C are put just after the corresponding font, then the attribute(s) Italic, Bold, Underline, StrikeOut, Regular, Unicode are indicated.
The atributes Underline and Strikeout are only valid if [Graphic]->color specials (-cmode:) is patch2. The cases are ignored.

Moreover (<num>) indicates the number of the character set.  Moreove [<num>] indicates the code page of the font and it is used to transform the character codes into unicode.

The above can be also indicated after the font name by writing Italic, Bold, Underline, Regular, UniCode, JIS2Uni, CID2Uni etc. and ANSI, Arabic, Baltic, ChineseBig5, default, EastEurope, GB2312, Greek, Hanguel, Hebrew, Johab, Mac, OEM, Russian, ShiftJIS, Symbol, Turkish, Thai, Vietnames for the character set.
JIS2Uni, CID2Uni mean to translate from jis code and CID code, respectively, into unicode.  In these cases, Unicode should not be indicated.
The cases are ignored.

The character '-' is indicated not to use the TrueType font.

The line starting with one of the characters % ; or # is ignored. But # is used for the definition of parameters if this is read by propw (Attached Programs).

If the content of a line is %skip, then the following lines are ignored until the line with the content %endskip appears.

Moreover the file can read other files to write the filename after the keyword %input.  If the filename starts with '$', there shows no Warning even if the file cannot be found.  The attached ttfonts.map has a line

%input $user.map

and the user can make $user.map for extra data.  This extra data will not be overwritten by the version up of dviout.

This is an example:
%sample
wtmr    "Times New Roman"       regular
wtmri   "Times New Roman"       italic
wtmb    "Times New Roman"       bold
wtmbi   "Times New Roman"       italic,bold
symbol   symbol                 unicode,symbol
jbtm@UKS@   Gulim               unicode

The above means the same as the following
%sample
wtmr    "Times New Roman/R"
wtmri   "Times New Roman/I"
wtmb    "Times New Roman/B"
wtmbi   "Times New Roman/IB"
symbol   symbol/C(2)
jbtm@UKS@    Gulim/C

A definiton of a font where Unicode is indicated, the definiton is ignored unless the Windows system is Windows2000/XP or later.

A map to the path of the Europian TrueType font can be indicated.  This means that dviout expand the fonts by its inner routine not by Windows API.  In this case, the corresponding tfm file should be searched by -TEXPK: and its directory should be indicated by -TEXROOT:. For example

wnsr8r	^w\fonts\times.ttf

If the code-index table for 2 byte code (Format 4) is used, /1 can be added as an option (for BaKoMa, Times New Roman etc.) and /5 for Symbol fonts.  If the one with 1 byte code (Format 0) is used, /4 can be added (for some fonts used by TeX).  Moreove the number is larger than 256, it is considerd to be the code page number.
For example

wnsr8r	^w\fonts\times.ttf/1

If the mapping file is indicated, the transformation by the map is applied preceeding the correspondence in [WinJFont].  Hence if edeault is defined in [WinJFont], any TrueType font defined in Windows can be written for the font in TeX (cf. Q_F14).

Remark: In the package of dviout, the default mapping file ttfonts.map is contained.  If an original mapping file is used, it is recommended to use a different name because ttfonts.map in the directory of dviout may be overwritten by the installation of dviout.


-g:
The Japanese font for horizontal writing is also substituted for vertical writing(Property Sheets->[JFont2]).  This parameter takes value of ON or OFF.

When a Windows TrueType Japanese font for vertical writing uses the API (set in the default [WinJfont]), checking is not used.


-gbox:
When importing a graphic image, the frame of the image can be displayed (Property Sheets->[Graphic]).  This parameter takes a vlue of ON or OFF.


-gclip:
If you check this box, the image obtained from EPSF is clipped by its BoundindBox.  If -gow: is ON, the image is always clipped.


-gdat:
The directory where PBM (produced by Ghostscript) or BMP files viewed by dviout can be specified explicitly by "-gdat:" (Property Sheets->[Graphic]).

The default directory where dviout searches for these image files is the Current Directory (directory containing the dvi file).

This is also referenced as the search path for files such as EPSF, PS, PBM or BMP files read by dviout.  More than one directory can be specified with separator ;.  The one first specified becomes the directory for storage of the PBM (temporarily created by dviout) or BMP files .

If the long path name has a space character, use the short path name.


-gen:
When the template file written to set the methods for creating and storing fonts (Template for Font Creation) is specified by the gen=<template_file> option, and dviout could not find the font, METAFONT starts and Automatic Font Generation is possible for missing fonts(Property Sheets->[Font2]
).

The basic font creation process and environment must be described in the template file.  dviout creates the batch file containing data such as the required font name and size conforming to the template file settings, then dviout executes it.  Fot these processes, METAFONT is necessary and you should check if it runs properly.

If a command in one line executes this font generation as in the case of using mktexpk, MakeTeXPK or makepk, the command line with adding the letter ` at the head can be directly set in -gen: and it is not necessary to prepare a template file.

In this case, it is desirable to write the command in the full path name.  If it contains a space character, it should be written in the format of the short path name.

If the METAFONT source cannot be found or there are mistakes in the setting parameters, the needed routines are collected and output to another batch file.  Then, by executing this batch file, you can create required fonts manually even if the fonts are not created automatically.


-gfit:
The PostScript color image is converted into a BMP file by Ghostscript.  Whether to set generation in the reduced size to on when previewing in the reduced size and using the gray scale is specified (Property Sheet -> [Graphic]).

This parameter can be set to ON or OFF.

OFF defects: When the dpi of the used font is large, and if the size of the color BMP file becomes large and some limit is exceeded, it takes an extremely long time to display (this might be due to the Windows specifications).

Since reduction while displaying is performed by Windows, sometimes lines disappear or blur.

A lot of the memory and the disk workspace are used.

ON defects: An image viewed by loupe is actually enlarged and is not clean. If the number of dpi is large, the Windows API may fail to enlarge a colored figure.

When the preview scale changes or in the case of printing, color BMP is recreated.


-GIF:
This specifies the format of the image file created and used by dviout using Ghostscript.  Since it is an integer variable, an integer from 0 to 5 is specified in the parameter file.

0(raw PBM)       : For printer output that is not color or only for black-and-white images.
1(monochrome GIF): Not supported by the most recent Ghostscript.
2(monochrome BMP)
3(16   color BMP)
4(256  color BMP): For Previews for both color and black-and-white images.
5(full color BMP): For color Printing using subtle colors.

The above are started with pbmraw, bmpmono, bmp16, bmp256, or bmp16m, respectively, in the -sDEVICE= option in Ghostscript.

Only the settings supported by the Ghostscript being used can be set.  (When the "-help" option is added and Ghostscript is started, the supported image formats are determined.)

Note: If BMP for many colors is used to handle color images, the available space in the memory and the hard disk must be large (particularly, as the image gets larger).

Note: When the -sDEVICE=bmp16 option is added and Ghostscript is started, the 16-color BMP format is not used, but only 16 colors in the 256-color BMP format (or something similar) are used.
In this case, even if there is switching between the 16-color mode and the 256-color mode, dviout does not update BMP files and uses them as 16-color BMP.
If 16-color BMP is switched to 256-color BMP, delete the 16-color BMP files, or convert from 16-color BMP -> monochrome BMP -> 256-color BMP.


-gow:
If this option is set to ON, each image is drawn after erasing the previous content of the canvas area.  The default behavior is to keep the previous content (Property Sheets->[Graphic]).

Note that if the option is ON, included EPSF images are always clipped. (cf. PostScript special parameters).

For characters, set -cmode: to replace for the similar behavior.


-GS:

This specifies the processing for PostScript specials, PS/EPS files, PBM files or BMP files.

The following specifications are possible.  (Since this is an integer parameter, the following numbers are specified in the parameter file.)

If PostScript specials which contain PostScript codes can be ignored.  This is indicated by adding 16 to the value of -GS: given in the following.  In spite of this setting, PSfrag is usually interpreted.

0(Off): Ignore

1(On): Handles EPS/PS files, PS codes, PBM files, and the special commands related to PBM files.  Ghostscript must be called.  If it is not found, the process ends.

2(verbose): Handles EPS/PS files, PS codes, PBM files, and the special commands related to PBM files.

3(PBM): Ghostscript is not started.
If the corresponding PBM (or BMP) file is present, use that file.  If it does not exist, skip.
In this case, the scale is changed by appropriate magnification or reduction even if the required Image data file and dot size differ.
The horizontal size is considered to be equal if the value rounded up to the byte width (8-dot unit) is the same.

4(exact PBM): Ghostscript will not be invoked.

If the PBM (or BMP) file containing the size exists, use it.  If it does not exist, skip.

5(gssub): Ghostscript is not started.
As in 4, if the required image data file does not exist, the gs_exec.bat batch file that converts the EPS/PS file to a PBM or BMP file (read in by dviout) and the gs_exec$.ps PS file are created.  The additional program ofgssub.exe is required.

If gs_exec.bat and gs_exec$.ps already exist, delete gs_exec.bat and gs_exec$.ps before starting when needed since the end of existing contents will be added to.

Since this batch file that is created converts only files that do not exist from among the required PBM files (or BMP files), if this batch file is started, starting with the next dviout, the PBM files (BMP files) can be directly read.
However, if images with different sizes are created multiple times from the same EPS file or direct PostScript codes are written in \special, they cannot be handled by the batch file that is created previously.


-gsize:
The size for reading in an EPS/PS image is set by the PostScript specials parameter.  If the magnification of the dvi file is not 1000 (i.e., when

\mag=\magstep1

is in the TeX source), when the read-in size written in the PostScript specials is set to the size after magnification, the "-gsize:" switch is turned on (parameter set to ON or OFF, Property Sheets->[Graphic]).

In particular, if images are read in using epsbox.sty in a dvi file with a magnification other than 1000, specify "-gsize:".

If epsbox.sty is used, the PostScript specials having the scale conversion for the magnification are created.  This can prevent the loss of the correct size by the two scale conversions of this conversion and the scale conversion in dviout.


-gsx:
The Ghostscript used when dviout interprets PostScript has the file name of gswin32.exe.  The default is the file in the directory in the path.  However, the start-up command for this program with the path can be specified explicitly by -gsx: (Property Sheets->[Graphic]).

If the long path name has a space character, use the short path name.  The path name obtained by pushing [gsx:] button is the short one.

Parameters of Ghostscript can be spcified also.  for this, replace the spaces with ^ as the delimiters when specifying.  For example,

-gsx:c:\gstools\gs4.03\gswin32c.exe^-dNOKANJI


-hbuf:
This is the size of the string buffer for storing the jump destination or label name in the cache when handling HyperTeX (Property Sheets->[HyperTeX]).  This parameter is specified by a positive integer.


-hname:
This is the sum of the number of labels of the jump destination in the cache size when handling HyperTeX (Property Sheets->[HyperTeX]) and the number of source specials.  This is specified by a positive integer.


-HC:
The text width read from a dvi file is regarded as the horizontal width of the text.  This parameter can specify the centering in the horizontal direction of the text based on the horizontal width that is set for the paper (Property Sheets->[Paper]).  This parameter is specified as a length.


-href:
This is the number of HyperJumps in the cache size when handling HyperTeX (Property Sheets->[HyperTeX]).  This is specified by a positive integer.


-HS:
When the centering in the horizontal direction -HC: was specified, this option can define the movement in the horizontal direction after centering (Property Sheets->[Paper]).  This parameter is set to ON or OFF.


-hyper:
This specifies the display format of the string indicating HyperJump in HyperTeX ([HyperTeX]).  This specified by an integer in the parameter file.  (Hexadecimal specifications are useful.)

The display format of "-hyper:mode" is the same as the  -search:.  Refer the description there.  However, the value of "mode & 0xf00" is ignored.


-hyperoff:
This sets the handling of HyperTeX specials (Property Sheets->[HyperTeX]).

0:  Default
1: Ignore HyperTeX specials (disable HyperJump)
2: Do not display the dialog box even if the HyperJump is to the outside (direct outerjump).

The above numbers are specified in the parameter file.


-J:
If the <num> number is specified as in "-j:<num>", the position is adjusted so that the base line is lowered only for <num>/1000 times the height of the font from the value calculated from the jfm file (cf. Property Sheets->[JFont2]).

The default is zero.  The specification allows a negative value for the integer.


-JC:
This sets the substitute for Japanese font characters (Property Sheets->[JFont2]).

-JC:<number>:<new_code>=old_code[y|t]:...:new_code=old_code[y|t]

In <number>, the total number (of definitions) of a converted character is given by a decimal number.  <new_code> and <old_code> are four-digit hexadecimal numbers.  JIS codes are converted from the <old_code> characters to the <new_code> characters.

By default, both the vertical characters and horizontal characters are converted.
If "y" is specified, only the horizontal characters are converted.  If "t" is specified, only the vertical characters are converted.
The search starts from the beginning, only the first conversion found is valid.


-L:
This sets the way to truncate a font name longer than eight characters.  Since there are restrictions on the length of a file name, this is used in MS-DOS (Property Sheets->[Font]).
In Windows 95/98/Me or NT/2000, the default is no truncation.  For lcircle10,

2(Cut no part):       lcircle10 -> lcircle10
0(Cut last part):      lcircle10 -> lcircle1
1(Cut middle part): lcircle10 -> lcirle10

This is an integer variable.  The above numbers are specified in the parameter file.


-LM:
This represents the width of the unprintable area on the left side of the paper.This parameter is specified as a length.

Therefore, the horizontal directions of the print positions in the printer and its dedicated driver are corrected.  A temporary adjustment is made by -OX:.  (Property Sheets -> [Printer])


-log:
This parameter specifies the path name of the log file recording information such as the dviout errors and warnings (Property Sheets->[System]).

When there is only +, the log file is created with the file name dviout.log in the directory containing dviout.exe.  On the other hand, if there is -, the log file is not created.  This setting can be changed from the Menu Bar.


-macro:
Define five macros (Macro1,...,Macro5) for keys (Property Sheets->[Key]).

5 macros are defined successively being separated by blanks.  The format is the same as variables of the functions [ValueSet(parameter=value)]  or [Function(key)] of DDE in Link to Other Program.
Here the sign - should be put preceeding to the parameter in the first case to be distingushed to the latter. Moreover the value should not contain a space nor a control character.
Generally the commands in the format of dviout specials are allowed.

Combining these variables makes one macro.  If there exist spaces in a macro, the macro should be surrounded by " ".  Note that these macros cannot be nested.  Here is an example:

DTDF "-y=A4L -LM=5mm -RM=5mm FN" JMJBJRJF JTSD JBSU

Note that this macro can be assigned to any key.


-mag:
When the vertical and horizontal sizes are converted and this is not specified, the value of \magstep written in the dvi file is used (Property Sheets->[Resolution]).

If \magstep is m, the size is 1.2^m times.  A font resolution is searched for as a conversion that corresponds to this value.

The magstep values of 0, 1,..., 9 can be specified in the parameter file.  A "-1" indicates the default.  The "magstep half" specifies "-half=+".

Regardless of the current state, the default is always displayed on the [Resolution] in Property Sheets.  (Erroneously setting a special magstep at start-up is prevented.)  The current mag value can be found by "Help -> Information".


-mode:
This option alters the current mode, which is specified by a number from 0 to 9.  The parameters for that mode are then read from the Windows Registry.

This option has the same effect as modifying the Option->Mode... settings from the toolbar, but is effective at the next Open or ReNew.

This parameter can be set at startup as a command-line parameter, or DDE communication.  It can be used to start dviout with a mode different from the default which is set on the Property Sheets->[REGISTRY] page.


-multi:
This is the maximum number of dviouts that can run at the same time  (Property Sheets->[System]).  This is specified by a positive integer.


-ntt:
Setting ON -ntt: specification, the Japanese font for pTeX supported by dviout can be used from a dvi file typeset by NTT JTeX (Property Sheets->[JFont2]).


-nttF:
When a NTT JTeX Japanese font is replaced by a pTeX (by ASCII Corp.) Japanese font by the -ntt: option, when a new Japanese font is added and defined by \jfont, the added Japanese font name must be taught to the dviout.

The following option "-nttF:" is used here (Property Sheets->[JFont2]).

-nttF:<jfm_file_1>=<added_font_1>;<jfm_file_2>=<added_font_2>;...

Note that in this option, a name not containing the point number (10, 12, etc.) or the resolution (118, 360, etc.) is specified.


-OX:
This sets the correction of the output position in the horizontal direction (Property Sheets->[Paper]).  This parameter is specified as a length and can be a negative value.
CTRL+SHIFT+Left/Right Arrow key directly changes this parameter by 0.5pt = 0.176mm.


-OY:
This sets the correction of the output position in the vertical direction (Property Sheets->[Paper]).  This parameter is specified as a length and can be a negative value.
CTRL+SHIFT+Up/Down Arrow Key directly changes this parameter by 0.5pt = 0.178mm.


-renew:
This can set the function that checks whether the displayed dvi file has been changed, and if so, automatically updates the display when returning again to the dviout window after moving to other windows  (Property Sheets->[System]).  This parameter is set to ON or OFF.


-RM:
This specifies the width of the unprintable area on the right side of the paper (top in the landscape orientation).  This parameter is specified as a length.  (cf. Property Sheets -> [Printer])


-S:
This adjusts the size, if a Japanese font other than JXL4, such as Windows 95 TrueType Japanese font, is used.

The default is to adjust to the size proportional to the value set by 1000 (cf.  Property Sheets->[JFont2]).  For example, if 950, there is a 5% reduction.  This is specified by a positive integer.


-scale:
This sets the display mode of the four views of "Display -> View1,..., View4".This can be set by "Property Sheets -> [Display]".

-scale:<x1>:<y1>:<z1>:<x2>:...:<y4>;<z4>

can be set (same specification as in the parameter file).<x1>:<y1>:<z1> corresponds to View1, and the others are the same.  Similar to  -BMP:, these three numbers represent the reduction in the horizontal direction, the reduction in the vertical direction, and the gamma correction (+screen reverse).


-sdpi:
This sets the maximum resolution (dpi in gray scale) that allows coloring the strings by HyperTeX or in a string search (Property Sheets->[Search]).  This is specified by a positive integer.

To save the memory, the default is set to 150.

An image seen in a loupe cannot be colored these highlight.


-search:

This specifies the display format of the strings found by a string search ([Search]).

When -search:mode,

mode & 0x8000 = 0: The whole box or the character inside or the frame is colored.
mode & 0x8000 = 0x8000  : This draws a colored line (usually, mode & 0x80 = 0x80)
In addition,
  (mode & 0x10000)?: Color characters together with line?
  (mode & 0x04000)?: In vertical writing, is the line on the right side?
  (mode & 0x02000)?: In horizontal writing, are there overbars and no underlining?
  (mode & 0x01000)?: In horizontal writing, is the underlining at the bottom?

   mode & 0x02 = 0      : fill box
                          2      : draw frame

   mode & 0x0c = 0      : or  color
                          4      : set color
                          8      : reverse  (ignore : mode & 0xf0)

   mode & 0x80 = 0      : background
                          0x80 : foreground

   mode & 0xf0 =
     color box (with gray characters in black)
        0x00: original             0x10: yellow box    0x20: magenta box
        0x30: red box            0x40: cyan box       0x50: green box
        0x60: blue box          0x70: black box

     color characters (gray scaled with a white background)
        0x80: black char        0x90: blue char       0xa0: green char
        0xb0: cyan char        0xc0: red char        0xd0: magenta char
        0xe0: yellow char       0xf0: while char

   mode & 1 is ignored.
   mode = 0xf0 means the string is erased.
   The colors in the reverse mode become complementary colors.

The above is the same for -hyper:.

   mode & 0x100  = 0: The coloring of the searched string is individual.
                         != 0: The entire string found on that page is colored.

   mode & 0x200  = 0: The mouse cursor does not move.
                         != 0: The mouse cursor points to the searched string.


-sFont:
This parameter specifies which fonts (usually symbols fonts) to be ignored in String Search or String Copy contexts (Property Sheets->[Search]).

List fonts to be ignored, delimited by semicolons (; ), followed by a space character, followed by fonts that have only uppercase letters (A to Z), also delimited by semicolons.  For the latter, lowercase and other characters are ignored.

The tail part of the font name may be omitted by appending an asterisk (* ).  In this case, the delimiting semicolon (; ) is can also be omitted.  Thus, lasy* stands for lasy8, lasy10, etc.  Here's an example:

-sFont:cmex*lasy*line*lcircle*  cmsy*cmbsy*


-spi:
There is a image viewer software named Susie freely available (See the last part of install.txt).  Some DLL's of Susie plug-in are developed for some image format.

By employing Susie, dviout for Windows can import various file formats of image.  Parameter -spi: specifies the directory where Susie exists.  The default is the directory where dviout exists.


-t:
This sets the number of dots in one scroll (Property Sheets->[Display]).

The larger this value, the faster the scrolling, but the scrolling is no longer smooth.  This is specified by a positive integer.


-TEXFLI:
When the FLI Font Library is used, the variable part of the font library name in -TEXPK: is represented by ^f and set.  The variable parts are listed in -TEXFLI: (Property Sheets->[Font2]).


-TEXFONTS:
This specifies the name of the directory containing the tfm files and the jfm files when using European Language TrueType Fonts in an old way, or PK fonts do not exist, but correctly sized spaces replace them if the tfm files exist (Property Sheets->[Font]).

^r, ;, and \\ can be used and have the same meanings as with -TEXPK:.


-TEXKNJ:
When using a bitmapped Japanese font on the disk used by the MS-DOS version of dviout, as in the MS-DOS version, that font is specified by -TEXKNJ: (Property Sheets->[JFont2]).  The number of horizontal dots in each font must be included in the file name.
In "-TEXKNJ:", that number of dots is specified by ^d.

For example, the specification can be

-TEXKNJ:c:\font\jfont\^s^d.pk;c:\font\jfont\kanji.^d
The ^s in TEXKNJ: is replaced by the string without the numbers at the end of the corresponding jfm file name without the extension (.tfm).

For example, for goth5.tfm or goth10.tfm, goth is substituted in ^s.  The last part in the above example specifies the presence of Japanese fonts such as goth.24, kanji.24, kanji.32, or kanji.48 in the c:\font\jfont directory.


-TEXPK:
This specifies the presence of Font Glyph Files such as  European language PK fonts. When TrueType fonts or ASCII pTeX is used, this also specifies the presence of tfm files or Japanese jfm files (Font Metric Files) (Property Sheets->[Font], Examples of TEXPK Settings
)

In this specification, ^ or % is grouped with the next character.  They are replaced by special values.  ^ can be changed to %.

 ^r  String specified by -TEXROOT:
 ^s  Font name(cmr10, min10, etc.)
 ^d  dpi(dots per inch) value
 ^l  Five times the dpi value
 ^g  Indicates a GTH Font Library or FAR Font Library
 ^f  Indicates the variable part of the FLI Font Library
 ^T  Directory which is defined by the environment variable TEXMFMAIN or TEXMF (if TEXMFMAIN is not defined).
 ^x  Directory where dviout was installed
 ^w  Windows system directory
 ^s^tfm  Same as ^s.tfm but it only corresponds to the TrueType fonts in the Windows system
 ^F  Fonts under Embedding into DVI file(Embed fonts)
 \\  Line of any directory names (kpathsea function)
 ;   Delimiter for multiple specifications. Precedence given to specification written earlier


-TEXPKD:
This creates the index file recording the location of each character raster (using pktopkd) for the PK font.  It can be specified by -TEXPK: and used.

"-TEXPKD:" specifies the location of the actual font in a part of the path from the root and is used with the relative directory path written in the index file (Property Sheets->[Font2]).

The following are used in MS-DOS.
 - When using a PK font larger than 64K bytes
 - When handling a dvi file that uses many PK files (for example, a file typeset by NTT's version of JTeX)


-TEXROOT:
If -TEXPK: or -TEXFONTS: are strings containing ^r or %r, it is substituted by the string set in -TEXROOT:(Property Sheets->[Font]).
The multiple strings are possible by separating by ;.

^T, ^w, ^x can be used (cf. -TEXPK:).
Path names from a shared root can be set.


-TM:
This represents the width of the unprintable area at the top of the paper.  This parameter is specified as a length.

Therefore, the vertical directions of the print positions in the printer and its dedicated driver are corrected.  A temporary adjustment is made by -OY:.  (cf. Property Sheets -> [Printer])


-tpic:
This specifies whether tpic specials commands are enabled; or if enabled, whether to use the Bezier curves when drawing curves (default) or to use spline curves and whether to rotate coordinate in pTeX tate mode or not(Property Sheets->[Graphic]).

This is an integer parameter. The above three choices are labeled as 0, 1, 2 and the final one for the rotation of the coordinate in pTeX tate mode is indicated by adding 16.


-ttf:
This controls the use of European Language TrueType Fonts (Property Sheets->[Font2]).  A non-negative number is specified.

-ttf:0    Prohibits the use of European language TrueType fonts.

-ttf: <num>   When <num> is a positive integer, the use of Europian Language TrueType Fonts is prohibited for a fonts smaller than <num> dpi(the value used in -TEXPK: by ^d).

The TrueType font is only used for a TeX font which satisfies the conditions
- -ttf:is positive and the size of the font is not small than this value
- the tfm file of the font is searched by -TEXPK:
- the correspondence of a TrueType font with this font is defined in Property Sheets->[WinJFont]

To validitate the change of the value of this parameter for all fonts, push [Flush] button in [Font2]. Otherwise this is applied only to the fonts that have never been used by dviout.


-varf:
When "-varf:" option is set to ON, fixed-size Japanese fonts are enlarged or reduced in continuous magnification, they can be used as a scalable font.

In addition, when the entire font is enlarged or reduced by the -e: option, the same adjustments are also made for fixed-size European language fonts.  This parameter is set to ON or OFF (Property Sheets->[Font2]).

Since the jfm file is read for a Japanese font and the vertical and horizontal directions are individually enlarged or reduced to obtain the appropriate vertical and horizontal sizes, flat types or long types can be handled.

If the size differs in the substitute font set by -F:, -FB: is used to adjust the size.


-VC:
If this parameter is specified, the height of the text read from a dvi file is regarded as the vertical height of the document.  Then, the document can be in centering in vertical direction on the sheet.  (Property Sheets->[Paper]).  A length value is set to this parameter.


-VS:
When the centering in the vertical direction is specified, the movement in the vertical direction after centering can be defined (Property Sheets->[Paper]).This parameter can be set to ON or OFF.


-vfn:
When Windows TrueType fonts or the Shotai-Club fonts are used, the configuration file (default file name of dviout.vfn) is specified by the full path name (Property Sheets->[JFont2]).

This cannot be used with the specification by [WinJFont]. The setting in [WinJFonts] erace the setting of -vfn: in [JFont2].  Hence to recover the default setting, push [Default] in [WinJFont] and push [Save] and [OK].

Specify only when using Shotai-Club fonts or embedding Japanese TrueType fonts in a DVI file(Font/Image Embedding).


-Wshow:
Dviout invokes METAFONTS for font generation and Ghostscript for PostScript interpretation etc.  These external programs are run in an iconified state (hidden in the Windows task bar, not as an open window) by default.

If the -Wshow: switch is ON, external programs are run as a separate window, which is open until the program ends (Property Sheets->[System]).  This switch should be set ON if the program stalls when iconified state.


-y:
The paper size and orientation are specified in "Property Sheets->[Paper]".  In the parameters in dviout.par, from the

-y:<papersize>[P:L].

<papersize> = A3, A4, A5, A6, A7, E3, E4, E5, E6, B3, B4, B5, B6, J1, J2, J3, J4, Legal, GovLegal, Letter, HalfLetter, GovLetter, Exective, H, SVGA, XGA, SXGA, UVGA etc.

These are the sizes for A3, A4, A5, A6, A7, B3E, B4E, B5E, B6E, B3J, B4J, B5J, B6J, KIKU, 46, NB, AB, Legal, GovLegal, Letter, HalfLetter, GovLetter, Exective, Post Card, SVGA, XGA, SXGA, UVGA etc., respectively.

By setting <papersize> = F<width>:<Height>, the vertical and horizontal lengths can be set independently.  (The <width> length is written as 12.5cm, 123mm, 1024dot/300dpi, for example -> Q_S3)

The P and L after <papersize> represent the portrait and landscape orientations of the paper.


-virtual:
This parameter switches enabling or disabling the use of Virtual Fonts(Property Sheets->[Font2])

- Tate mode in Japanese TeX is not supported.
- specials are not supported
- depth of local stack is at most 16


-src:
The way to operate the editor for source specials is indicated in this parameter. For example

c:\usr\local\bin\mule.exe^s+%d %s

Here %s corresponds to the TeX file and %d corresponds to the line number.  ^s is a separator between the program to be executed and its parameter.
If %n is indicated in place of %s, it is substituted by the name of the TeX file without extension. If < is put at the top such as

<c:\usr\local\bin\mule.exe^s+%d %s

then, dviout is minimaized after the editor is called.

To use DDE, one can indicate by

`service_name topic_name xtyp_execute`command

such as

`myedit myedit Open(+%d %s)`c:\bin\myedit.exe^s+%d "%s"

The service name, the topic name and the string sent by XTYP_EXECUTE are indicated by separating a space.  They are surrounded by ` and then the command follows which will be executed when the DDE server is not registered (cf. source specials).
If the latter ` is replaced by ``, the DDE transaction is executed after the execution of command.
If there are more than one XTYP_EXECUTE transactions, they are separated by |. For example,

`myedit myedit Open(%s)|Line(%d)``c:\bin\myedit.exe


-Fod:
The location of the font is searched on demand according to -TEXPK:.
Indicate ON/OFF(Property Sheets->[Font2]))


-G:
The Japanese fonts containing the indicated string is considered to be gothic font.  If there are several indicated strings, they are separated by ;(Property Sheets->[JFont2]).

It has meaning only when the dvi file is printed by dviprt Printing by LBP Driver or dviout uses poor man's gothic.


-TEXSUBF:
Indicates the location of SDF files *.sfd for subfonts (Property Sheets->[Font2]).

Suppose the following is written in the font map file indicated by -ftt:

  jbtm@UKS@     Gulim     unicode

Then for the font corresponding to jbtmxx.tfm, the Windows TrueType Gulim is used under the unicode with the transformation of the character codes from the 8 bit code into 16 bit code according to UKS.sfd.
Here xx is usually two letters.

^r, ;, and \\ can be used and have the same meanings as with -TEXPK:.


-Set:
The parameter value is a same string as the variable key of the DDE command [Function(key)] using Key Symbol and define key  (cf. Link to Other Program).

This is covenient to use in the parammeter file read by Choose Parameters etc.


-isp:
Indicate speicals (separated by ; )which will be ignored even if dviout cannot understand (Property Sheets->[Common]).

For example

-isp=pdf:;epsfig:


-gsrc:
Define the way to operate the graphic editor when an included graphic is pointed in the preview window as in the similar way in source specials.  For example

.ps.eps=c:\usr\local\bin\psedit.exe^s"%n";.bmp=mspaint^s"%s"

Indicate the extensions of graphic files and the corresponding operations as above with the separator ;.

The extensions are indicated including the last . and they may be gathered if they correspond to the same operation.  Then indicate the operation followed by =.

In the format to indicate the operation (as in the case of -src:) , ^s is the separator between the program to be executed and its parameter,  %s is the corresponding graphic file and %n is the filename without extension.

The graphic file whose extension is not defined here is ignored for the operation.


-texhelp:
Indicate the parameter to execute dviout by Help -> TeX (Property Sheets->[System]).

If the DVI file is not specifiled, ^x\HyperTeX\input.dvi is appended this parameter.  If the DVI file is specified, the end of this parameter should be .dvi. For example

-NULL=(555,-20)-(1027,737) -dpi=600 -BMP=6:6:800


-ToEdit:
Define the function copying a string to an editor through dviout specials `in `input (Property Sheets->[HyperTeX])

^c       Copy to the clipboard
^e       Copy by SendMessage(EditWnd, WM_CHAR, , )
^@ ^A ... ^_    Push the key CTRL+@  CTRL+A ... CTRL+_
^^       Push the key ^
Usual character  Puth the corresponding key

^c^V     default(copy to the clipboard and push CTRL+V)
^e       Valid for editors Hidemaru etc.


Terminology

dviout
  Contents
    Supported Functions
    Distribution
    dviout Users Group
    Known Problems
    MakeHelP
    Attached Programs
    Supplement
    Uninstall
    Preview
    Parameter List
    Example of Parameter Setting
    Property Sheets
    HyperTeX
    String Search
    String Copy
    Presentation Mode
      cover sheet
      pause special
      Key on Presentation
    Embedding into DVI file
      Extended DVI file
      tar file
      dviout specials
      source specials
      Font/Image Embedding
    Move
      Another file
      Page Number
    Start and Exit
      no more dviout
    Link to Other Programs
      Example Using DDE
    Installation
      Setting the Resolution
      Setting the Font Path
        Examples of TEXPK Settings
      Adjusting the Display Scale
      Adjusting the Print Position
      Associating dvi files with dviout
      Automatic Parameter Installation Function
    Printing
      Page Selection
      Page Option
        Page Macro
      Reduce/Magnify Printing Function
      Pause at Each Page
      Printing Two Pages per Sheet
      Page Printing Order
        Examples Using the Print Options
      Page Printing Order
      Cancel During Print Data Output
      Unite Print Jobs
      dviprt Printing
        Examples of dviprt Settings
        CFG File
        LBP Driver
        Including printer control codes into TeX file
  User Interface
    Menu Bar
      File Menu
        Automatic Save
      Jump Menu
      Search Menu
      Display Menu
      View Menu
      Presentation Menu
      Paper Menu
      Option Menu
        Choose Parameters
        Check color specials
        Change Japanese fonts
      Help Menu
    Information Display
      Information related to files and views
      Font Information
      Buffer Information
      System Information
      Key Function Table
      Parameter List
      Output of Parameter Setting
      Character Information
  Property Sheets
    [CONTENTS]
      [Save]
      [Restore]
      [OK]
      [Cancel]
      [Apply]
      [Help]
      [Default]
      current mode
    [Display]
      gamma correction
      gray scale
      HVscale
      reverse Display
    [Resolution]
      dpi
    [Font]
      [Guess]
        [Guess] Specifications
      Handling Missing Fonts
      Font Glyph File
      Font Metric File
      tfm file
      jfm file
      FLI Font Library
      European Language TrueType Font
      inch
      GTH Font Library
      FAR Font Library
      Font Check
        cmr10
        line10
        msam10
        lcircle10
        eufm10
        min10
        tmin10
      -F: specification
    [Font2]
      Automatic Font Generation
        Template for Font Creation
    [WinJFont]
      TrueType Font List
      H scale in [WinJFont]
      V scale in [WinJFont]
      [Define] in [WinJFont]
      [Remove] in [WinJFont]
      [Change Font]
      [Add Font]
      jfm/tfm in [WinJFont]
      Flat font in [WinJFont]
      Slanted font in [WinJFont]
      Orientation in [WinJFont]
      H position in [WinJFont]
      V position in [WinJFont]
    [JFont2]
      -ntt specification
    [Key]
      Define in [Key]
      Clear in [Key]
      Search in [Key]
      All Clear in [Key]
      Function in [Key]
      Key in [Key]
      Key Symbol
    [Search]
    [HyperTeX]
      HyperTeX specials
    [Common]
    [Graphic]
      BMP file
      BMC
      tpic specials
        tpic specials commands
        tpic specials extensions
      Image data files
        Image data file specials
        PostScript special parameters
        Examples using PostScript specials
        Ghostscript
      Current Directory
    [Printer]
    [Paper]
    [System]
    [REGISTRY]
      Registry
      Selected mode
        Current Name:
        Current mode:
        Default mode:
        Current Print:
      [Auto Load]
      [Ignore]
      [Save] in [REGISTRY]
      [Restore] in [REGISTRY]
      [All Set] in [REGISTRY]
      [All Clear] in [REGISTRY]
      list box in [REGISTRY]
  Q&A
  Parameters
    -A:
    -area:
    -base:
    -bb:
    -bf:
    -BM:
    -BMP:
    -box:
    -br:
    -bright:
    -Browser:
    -button:
    -c:
    -cmode:
    -color:
    -dpi:
    -dpiv:
    -dviprt:
    -e:
    -edge:
    -F:
    -FB:
    -file:
    -Fkeep:
    -Fod:
    -ftt:
    -G:
    -g:
    -gbox:
    -gclip:
    -gdat:
    -gen:
    -gfit:
    -GIF:
    -gow:
    -GS:
    -gsize:
    -gsrc:
    -gsx:
    -hbuf:
    -HC:
    -hname:
    -href:
    -HS:
    -hyper:
    -hyperoff:
    -isp:
    -J:
    -Jbt:
    -JC:
    -Jgt:
    -Jfm:
    -L:
    -LM:
    -log:
    -mag:
    -macro:
    -mode:
    -multi:
    -ntt:
    -nttF:
    -OX:
    -OY:
    -renew:
    -RM:
    -S:
    -scale:
    -sdpi:
    -search:
    -Set:
    -sFont:
    -spi:
    -src:
    -t:
    -TEXFLI:
    -TEXFONTS:
    -TEXKNJ:
    -TEXPK:
    -TEXPKD:
    -TEXROOT:
    -TEXSUBF:
    -texhelp:
    -TM:
    -ToEdit:
    -tpic:
    -ttf:
    -varf:
    -virtual:
    -VC:
    -VS:
    -vfn:
    -Wshow:
    -y:


Notes for non-Japanese Windows95/98/NT/XP users
You can run dviout for Windows on non-Japanese Windows95/98/NT (There are some reports of running on U.S.A. and German version of Windows95/NT).

- If you want to use Japanese TrueType fonts on non-Japanese Windows95/98/NT, see Q_F12

- If dviout indicates a warning with fonts when start up, just ignore the warning and press "NO".

Even on non-Japanese Windows95/98/NT dviout can treat pTeX(Japanized TeX developed by ASCII corp.) and NTT JTeX if you have jfm files and TrueType or bitmapped Japanese fonts.  Some of them can be obtained freely.